[go: up one dir, main page]

HK1221041B - Electronic touch communication - Google Patents

Electronic touch communication Download PDF

Info

Publication number
HK1221041B
HK1221041B HK16109057.3A HK16109057A HK1221041B HK 1221041 B HK1221041 B HK 1221041B HK 16109057 A HK16109057 A HK 16109057A HK 1221041 B HK1221041 B HK 1221041B
Authority
HK
Hong Kong
Prior art keywords
display
touch
external device
input
contact
Prior art date
Application number
HK16109057.3A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
HK1221041A1 (en
Inventor
F‧A‧安祖雷斯
I‧乔德里
A‧C‧戴伊
J‧P‧艾夫
D‧R‧科尔
N‧V‧金
K‧琳奇
G‧诺维克
D‧T‧普雷斯顿
M‧詹金斯
L‧Y‧杨
Original Assignee
苹果公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/US2015/034609 external-priority patent/WO2016036427A1/en
Application filed by 苹果公司 filed Critical 苹果公司
Publication of HK1221041A1 publication Critical patent/HK1221041A1/en
Publication of HK1221041B publication Critical patent/HK1221041B/en

Links

Description

电子触摸通信Electronic touch communication

相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

本申请要求以下申请的优先权:2014年9月2日提交的美国临时专利申请序列号62/044,961;2015年3月8日提交的美国临时专利申请序列号62/129,955;2015年6月7日提交的国际专利申请序列号PCT/US2015/034609;这些申请均通过引用以其整体并入于此。This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/044,961, filed September 2, 2014; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/129,955, filed March 8, 2015; and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2015/034609, filed June 7, 2015; all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.

本申请涉及以下共同未决的申请:2013年5月8日提交的、题为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface ObjectsCorresponding to an Application”的国际专利申请序列号PCT/US2013/040061;2013年11月11日提交的、题为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface forTransitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships”的国际专利申请序列号PCT/US2013/069483;2014年7月18日提交的、题为“Raise Gesture Detectionin a Device”的美国临时专利申请序列号62/026,532;2014年9月2日提交的、LawrenceYang等作为发明人的题为“REDUCED-SIZE INTERFACES FOR MANAING ALERTS”的美国临时专利申请。这些申请中的内容通过引用以其整体并入于此。This application is related to the following co-pending applications: International patent application serial number PCT/US2013/040061, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed on May 8, 2013; International patent application serial number PCT/US2013/069483, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed on November 11, 2013; U.S. provisional patent application serial number 62/026,532, entitled “Raise Gesture Detection in a Device,” filed on July 18, 2014; and U.S. provisional patent application entitled “REDUCED-SIZE INTERFACES FOR MANAING ALERTS,” filed on September 2, 2014, with Lawrence Yang et al. as inventors. The contents of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

技术领域Technical Field

本发明总体上涉及计算机用户界面,并且更具体地涉及用于与其他用户通信的用户界面。The present invention relates generally to computer user interfaces and, more particularly, to user interfaces for communicating with other users.

背景技术Background Art

近些年来电子设备的使用已经显著地增加(例如,访问音乐和发送/接收消息)。设备从用户接收输入,诸如选择用于回放的歌曲、从电话本选择消息收件人、用于消息正文的文本输入和选择文档的特定页。作为增加的设备使用的结果,向这样的设备中的用户输入的频率也已经显著地增加。The use of electronic devices has increased significantly in recent years (e.g., to access music and send/receive messages). The devices receive input from the user, such as selecting a song for playback, selecting a message recipient from a phone book, entering text for a message body, and selecting a specific page of a document. As a result of increased device use, the frequency of user input into such devices has also increased significantly.

发明内容Summary of the Invention

在一些实施例中,一种方法包括,在具有触敏显示器和可旋转输入机构的电子设备处:在所述触敏显示器上显示用户界面,所述用户界面包括多个对象和可供件,所述多个对象中的每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人相关联,所述可供件具有表示所述多个联系人中的第一联系人的可视外观;接收对应于所述可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入;以及响应于接收到对应于所述可旋转输入机构的所述旋转的所述输入,更新所述可供件的所述可视外观以表示所述多个联系人中的第二联系人。In some embodiments, a method includes, at an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display and a rotatable input mechanism: displaying a user interface on the touch-sensitive display, the user interface including a plurality of objects and an affordance, each of the plurality of objects being associated with a contact from a plurality of contacts, the affordance having a visual appearance representing a first contact from the plurality of contacts; receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism; and in response to receiving the input corresponding to the rotation of the rotatable input mechanism, updating the visual appearance of the affordance to represent a second contact from the plurality of contacts.

在一些实施例中,一种方法包括,在具有触敏显示器的电子设备处、在具有触敏显示器和可旋转输入机构的电子设备处:在所述触敏显示器上显示用户界面,所述用户界面包括多个对象和可供件,所述多个对象中的每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人相关联,所述可供件具有表示所述多个联系人中的第一联系人的可视外观;接收对应于所述多个对象中与所述多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联的对象的选择的第一输入;以及响应于接收到对应于所述多个对象中的所述对象上的所述联系人的所述输入,更新所述可供件的所述可视外观以表示所述多个联系人中的所述第二联系人。In some embodiments, a method includes, at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive display, at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive display and a rotatable input mechanism: displaying a user interface on the touch-sensitive display, the user interface including a plurality of objects and an affordance, each of the plurality of objects being associated with a contact from a plurality of contacts, the affordance having a visual appearance representing a first contact from the plurality of contacts; receiving a first input corresponding to a selection of an object from the plurality of objects that is associated with a second contact from the plurality of contacts; and in response to receiving the input corresponding to the contact on the object from the plurality of objects, updating the visual appearance of the affordance to represent the second contact from the plurality of contacts.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

为了更好地理解所描述的各种实施例,下面应当结合附图参考对实施例的描述,其中相似的附图标记指代附图中的对应部分。For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the following description of the embodiments in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, wherein like reference numerals designate corresponding parts throughout the drawings.

图1A是图示了根据一些实施例的具有触敏显示器的便携式多功能设备的框图。Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

图1B是图示了根据一些实施例的用于事件处理的示例性部件的框图。FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event processing according to some embodiments.

图2图示了根据一些实施例的具有触摸屏的便携式多功能设备。FIG2 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.

图3是根据一些实施例的具有显示器和触敏表面的示例性多功能设备的框图。3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.

图4A图示了根据一些实施例的用于便携式多功能设备上的应用的菜单的示例性用户界面。4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

图4B图示了根据一些实施例的用于具有与显示器分离的触敏表面的多功能设备的示例性用户界面。4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.

图5A图示了根据一些实施例的个人电子设备。FIG5A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图5B是图示了根据一些实施例的个人电子设备的框图。5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图6A-6E图示了用于电子触摸通信的示例性用户界面。6A-6E illustrate exemplary user interfaces for electronic touch communications.

图7A-7E图示了用于电子触摸通信的示例性用户界面。7A-7E illustrate exemplary user interfaces for electronic touch communications.

图8图示了用于电子触摸通信的示例性用户界面。FIG8 illustrates an exemplary user interface for electronic touch communications.

图9A-9C图示了用于电子触摸通信的示例性用户界面。9A-9C illustrate exemplary user interfaces for electronic touch communications.

图10A-10C描绘了图示用于电子触摸通信的过程的流程图。10A-10C depict a flow diagram illustrating a process for electronic touch communication.

图11是图示了用于电子触摸通信的过程的流程图。11 is a flow chart illustrating a process for electronic touch communication.

图12是图示了用于电子触摸通信的过程的流程图。12 is a flow chart illustrating a process for electronic touch communication.

图13是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。13 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图14是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。FIG14 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图15是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。15 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图16是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。FIG16 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图17是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。FIG17 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

图18A-18K图示了用于电子通信的示例性用户界面。18A-18K illustrate exemplary user interfaces for electronic communications.

图19A-19B图示了用于电子通信的示例性用户界面。19A-19B illustrate exemplary user interfaces for electronic communications.

图20图示了用于电子通信的示例性用户界面。FIG20 illustrates an exemplary user interface for electronic communications.

图21图示了用于电子通信的示例性用户界面。FIG. 21 illustrates an exemplary user interface for electronic communications.

图22和23图示的是图示出用于电子触摸通信的过程的流程图。22 and 23 illustrate flow charts illustrating processes for electronic touch communication.

图24和25是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。24 and 25 are functional block diagrams of electronic devices according to some embodiments.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

以下描述阐明了示例性方法、参数等。然而,应当认识到这样的描述并不旨在对本公开内容的范围的限制,而是相反被提供为示例性实施例的描述。The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, etc. However, it should be appreciated that such description is not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure, but is instead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.

下面,图1A-1B、图2、图3、图4A-4B以及图5A-5B提供了可以提供用于电子触摸通信的这种用户界面的示例性设备的描述。图6A-6E、图7A-7E、图8、图9A-9C、图18A-18K、图19A-19B、图20以及图21图示了用于电子触摸通信的示例性用户界面。图中的用户界面也用来图示下面所描述的过程,包括在图10A-10C、图11-13、图22以及图23中的过程。Below, Figures 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5B provide descriptions of exemplary devices that can provide such user interfaces for electronic touch communication. Figures 6A-6E, 7A-7E, 8, 9A-9C, 18A-18K, 19A-19B, 20, and 21 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for electronic touch communication. The user interfaces in the figures are also used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 10A-10C, 11-13, 22, and 23.

虽然以下描述使用术语“第一”、“第二”等来描述各个元件,但是这些元件不应当被术语限制。这些术语仅用于将一个元件与另一元件进行区分。例如,第一触摸可以被称作第二触摸,并且类似地,第二触摸可以被称作第一触摸,而不脱离各种描述的实施例的范围。第一触摸和第二触摸均是触摸,但它们不是相同的触摸。Although the following description uses the terms "first," "second," etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first touch can be referred to as a second touch, and similarly, a second touch can be referred to as a first touch without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch.

各种描述的实施例的描述中所使用的术语在本文中仅用于描述具体实施例,并不旨在限制。除非上下文以其他方式明确指出,否则各种描述的实施例的描述以及所附权利要求书中所使用的单数形式“一”、“一个”和“所述”旨在也包括复数形式。还应当理解,本文所使用的术语“和/或”是指代并且涵盖相关联列出的项目的一个或多个条目中的任何项目以及所有可能的组合。进一步应当理解,术语“包括”、“具有”、“包含”和/或“含有”在本说明书中使用时指定了特征、整体、步骤、操作、元件和/或部件的存在,但并不排除一个或多个其他特征、整体、步骤、操作、元件、部件和/或它们的组合的存在或添加。The terms used in the description of the various described embodiments are used herein only to describe specific embodiments and are not intended to be limiting. Unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, the singular forms "one", "an" and "said" used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims are intended to also include plural forms. It should also be understood that the term "and/or" used herein refers to and covers any item in one or more items of the associated listed items and all possible combinations. It should further be understood that the terms "comprises", "having", "including" and/or "containing" when used in this specification specify the presence of features, wholes, steps, operations, elements and/or parts, but do not exclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, wholes, steps, operations, elements, parts and/or combinations thereof.

术语“如果”取决于上下文可以被解读为表示“在…时”或“一旦…则”或者“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地,短语“如果确定”或“如果检测到[陈述的条件或事件]”取决于上下文可以被解读为表示“一旦确定,则”或“响应于确定”或者“一旦检测到[陈述的条件或事件]”或“响应于检测到[陈述的条件或事件]”。The term "if" may be interpreted to mean "when" or "upon" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting," depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase "if it is determined" or "if [stated condition or event] is detected" may be interpreted to mean "upon determination" or "in response to determining" or "upon detecting [stated condition or event]" or "in response to detecting [stated condition or event]," depending on the context.

对电子设备、针对这种设备的用户界面以及用于使用此类设备的相关联过程的实施例进行描述。在一些实施例中,设备是便携式通信设备(诸如移动电话),其还包含其他功能,诸如PDA和/或音乐播放器功能。便携式多功能设备的示例性实施例包括但不限于:来自加利福尼亚州、库比蒂诺的Apple公司的iPod和设备。诸如具有触敏表面(例如,触摸屏显示器和/或触摸板)的膝上型计算机或平板计算机之类的其他便携式电子设备也可以被使用。还应当理解的是,在一些实施例中,该设备不是便携式通信设备,而是具有触敏表面(例如,触摸屏显示器和/或触摸板)的台式计算机。Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device (such as a mobile phone) that also includes other functionality, such as a PDA and/or music player functionality. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, but are not limited to, iPods and devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices such as laptop computers or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touch pads) may also be used. It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device, but rather a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touch pads).

在以下论述中,描述了一种包括显示器和触敏表面的电子设备。然而,应当理解的是,该计算设备可以包括一个或多个其他物理用户界面设备,诸如物理键盘、鼠标和/或操纵杆。In the following discussion, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the computing device may include one or more other physical user interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, mouse, and/or joystick.

所述设备可以支持各种应用,诸如以下应用中的一个或多个应用:绘图应用、演示应用、文字处理应用、网站创建应用、盘编写应用、电子表格应用、游戏应用、电话应用、视频会议应用、电子邮件应用、即时消息收发应用、锻炼支持应用、照片管理应用、数码相机应用、数码录像机应用、web浏览应用、数字音乐播放器应用和/或数字视频播放器应用。The device can support various applications, such as one or more of the following applications: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephony application, a video conferencing application, an email application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video recorder application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

在设备上执行的各种应用可选地使用至少一个公共物理用户界面设备,诸如触敏表面。触敏表面的一个或多个功能以及在设备上显示的对应信息从一个应用向下一个应用和/或在各自应用中进行可选地调整和/或改变。通过此方式,设备的公共物理架构(诸如触敏表面)通过对于用户而言直观、透明的用户界面来可选地支持各种应用。Various applications executing on the device optionally use at least one common physical user interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface and corresponding information displayed on the device are optionally adjusted and/or changed from one application to the next and/or within each application. In this way, the common physical architecture of the device (such as the touch-sensitive surface) optionally supports various applications through a user interface that is intuitive and transparent to the user.

现在把注意力转向具有触敏显示器的便携式设备的实施例。图1A是图示根据一些实施例的具有触敏显示器系统112的便携式多功能设备100的框图。触敏显示器112有时被称作“触摸屏”,并且有时被认为或被称作触敏显示器系统。设备100包括存储器102(其可选地包括一个或多个计算机可读存储介质)、存储器控制器122、一个或多个处理单元(CPU)120、外围设备接口118、RF电路装置108、音频电路装置110、扬声器111、麦克风113、输入/输出(I/O)子系统106、其他输入或控制设备116以及外部端口124。设备100可选地包括一个或多个光学传感器164。设备100可选地包括用于检测设备100(例如,触敏表面,诸如设备100的触敏显示系统112)上的接触的强度的一个或者接触强度传感器165。设备100可选地包括用于在设备100上生成触觉输出的(例如,在触敏表面(诸如,设备100的触敏显示系统112或者设备300的触摸板335)上生成触觉输出)一个或者多个触觉输出生成器167。这些部件可选地在一个或多个通信总线或信号线103上进行通信。Attention is now directed to embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays. FIG1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes referred to as a “touch screen” and is sometimes considered or referred to as a touch-sensitive display system. Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage media), a memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, a peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, a speaker 111, a microphone 113, an input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external ports 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile output on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 335 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

如说明书和权利要求中所使用的,在触敏表面上接触的术语“强度”指代在触敏表面上接触(例如,手指接触)的力或者压力(单位面积的力),或者指代用于在触敏表面上接触的力或者压力的替代(代理)。接触的强度具有包括至少四个不同的值并且更典型地包括数百个不同的值(例如,至少256)的数值范围。可选地,使用各种方法和各种传感器或者传感器的组合来确定(或者测量)接触的强度。例如,在触敏表面下面的或者邻近于触敏表面的一个或者多个力传感器可选地用于在触敏表面上的各个点处测量力。在一些实现方式中,来自多个力传感器的力测量被组合(例如,加权平均数)以确定接触的估计的力。类似地,触笔的压敏尖端可选地用于确定在触敏表面上的触笔的压力。备选地,在触敏表面上检测到的接触区域的大小和/或对其的改变、接近接触的触敏表面的电容和/或对其的改变、接近接触的触敏表面的电阻和/或对其的改变可选地用作为触敏表面上的接触的力或者压力的替代。在一些实现方式中,用于接触力或者接触压力的替代测量直接地用于确定是否已经超过强度阈值(例如,强度阈值以对应于替代测量的单位被描述)。在一些实现方式中,用于接触力或者接触压力的替代测量被转换成估计的力或估计的压力,并且该估计的力或估计的压力用来确定是否已经超过强度阈值(例如,强度阈值是以压力的单位测量出的压力阈值)。将接触的强度用作用户输入的属性允许了对附加设备功能的用户访问,该附加设备功能否则在具有用于显示可供件(affordance)和/或接收用户输入(例如,经由触敏显示器、触敏表面或者物理/机械控制,诸如旋钮或者按钮)的有限有效面积(real estate)的尺寸减小的设备上(例如,在触敏显示器上)不可能由用户可访问。As used in the specification and claims, the term "intensity" of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a proxy for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a numerical range that includes at least four different values and more typically includes hundreds of different values (e.g., at least 256). Optionally, various methods and various sensors or combinations of sensors are used to determine (or measure) the intensity of a contact. For example, one or more force sensors below or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of the contact. Similarly, the pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of and/or changes to the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface in proximity to the contact and/or changes thereto, or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface in proximity to the contact and/or changes thereto are optionally used as a proxy for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the proxy measure for contact force or contact pressure is used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the proxy measure). In some implementations, the proxy measure for contact force or contact pressure is converted to an estimated force or estimated pressure, and the estimated force or estimated pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using intensity of contact as an attribute of user input allows user access to additional device functionality that would otherwise not be accessible to the user on a reduced size device (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) having limited real estate for displaying affordances and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, touch-sensitive surface, or physical/mechanical controls such as knobs or buttons).

如说明书和权利要求中所使用的,术语“触觉输出”指代将由用户使用该用户的触感检测到的设备相对于设备的之前位置的物理位移、设备的部件(例如,触敏表面)相对于设备的另一部件(例如,外壳)的物理位移或者部件相对于设备的重心的位移。例如,在设备或者设备的部件与对触摸敏感的用户的表面(例如,手指、手掌或者用户的手的其他部分)接触的情况下,由物理位移产生的触觉输出将由用户解读为对应于感受到的设备或者设备的部件的物理特性中的变化的触觉感觉。例如,触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器或者触控板)的移动可选地由用户解读为物理致动器按钮的”向下点击”或者”向上点击”。在一些情况下,即使当不存在与由用户的移动物理地按压(例如位移)的触敏表面相关联的物理致动器按钮的移动时,用户将感觉到触觉感觉,诸如”向下点击”或者”向上点击”。作为另一个示例,即使当触敏表面的平滑度没有变化时,触敏表面的移动可选地由用户解读或者感觉为触敏表面的“粗糙度”。虽然由用户对触摸的这种解读将受到用户的个性化的感官知觉的影响,但是存在对大多数用户共同的触摸的许多感官知觉。因此,当触觉输出被描述为对应于用户的特定感官知觉(例如,”向上点击”、“向下点击”、“粗糙度”)时,除非另作说明,否则将生成用于典型的(或者平均的)用户的描述的感官知觉的生成的触觉输出对应于设备或者其部件的物理位移。As used in the specification and claims, the term "tactile output" refers to a physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, a physical displacement of a component of a device (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) relative to another component of the device (e.g., a housing), or a displacement of a component relative to the center of gravity of the device that is detected by a user using the user's sense of touch. For example, when a device or a component of the device is in contact with a touch-sensitive surface of a user (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of the user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a change in the physical properties of the device or component of the device that is felt. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) may be interpreted by the user as a "down click" or "up click" of a physical actuator button. In some cases, the user will feel a tactile sensation such as a "down click" or "up click" even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface being physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movement. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface may be interpreted or felt by the user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface even when there is no change in the smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While this interpretation of touch by a user will be influenced by the user's individual sensory perceptions, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to most users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., "up click," "down click," "roughness"), unless otherwise specified, the generated tactile output corresponds to a physical displacement of the device or a component thereof for the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.

应当理解,设备100仅是便携式多功能设备的一个示例,并且设备100可选地具有比所示部件更多或更少的部件,可选地组合两个或更多部件,或者可选地具有不同的部件配置或布置。图1A中所示出的各个部件可以在硬件、软件或硬件和软件两者的组合、包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路中进行实施。It should be understood that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 may alternatively have more or fewer components than shown, may alternatively combine two or more components, or may alternatively have a different configuration or arrangement of components. The various components shown in FIG1A may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.

存储器102可以包括一个或者多个计算机可读存储介质。计算机可读存储介质可以是有形的和非瞬态的。存储器102可以包括高速随机存取存储器,并且还可以包括非易失性存储器,诸如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储器设备。存储器控制器122可以控制通过设备100的其他部件对存储器102的访问。Memory 102 may include one or more computer-readable storage media. Computer-readable storage media may be tangible and non-transitory. Memory 102 may include high-speed random access memory and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122 may control access to memory 102 by other components of device 100.

外围设备接口118可以用于将设备的输入和输出外围设备耦合至CPU 120和存储器102。一个或多个处理器120运行或执行存储器102中存储的各种软件程序和/或指令集,以执行针对设备100的各种功能以及用于处理数据。在一些实施例中,外围设备接口118、CPU 120以及存储器控制器122可以在单个芯片(诸如,芯片104)上进行实施。在一些其他实施例中,它们可以在分离的芯片上进行实施。Peripheral device interface 118 can be used to couple the input and output peripheral devices of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102. One or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or instruction sets stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripheral device interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 can be implemented on a single chip (such as chip 104). In some other embodiments, they can be implemented on separate chips.

RF(射频)电路装置108接收并且发送RF信号,也被称作电磁信号。RF电路装置108将电信号转换成电磁信号/将电磁信号转换成电信号,并且经由电磁信号与通信网络以及其他通信设备进行通信。RF电路装置108可选地包括用于执行这些功能的已知电路装置,包括但不限于:天线系统、RF收发机、一个或多个放大器、调谐器、一个或多个振荡器、数字信号处理器、CODEC芯片集、订户标识模块(SIM)卡、存储器等。RF电路装置108可选地通过无线通信,与诸如也称为万维网(WWW)的因特网、内联网和/或诸如蜂窝式电话网络、无线局域网(LAN)和/或城域网(MAN)的无线网络以及其他设备进行通信。RF电路装置108可选地包括用于检测近场通信(NFC)场的已知电路装置,诸如通过短程通信无线电。无线通信可选地使用多种通信标准、协议和技术中的任何一种,包括但不限于:全球移动通信系统(GSM)、增强型数据GSM环境(EDGE)、高速下行链路分组接入(HSDPA)、高速上行链路分组接入(HSUPA)、仅演进数据(EV-DO)、HSPA、HSPA+、双小区HSPA(DC-HSPDA)、长期演进(LTE)、近场通信(NFC)、宽带码分多址(W-CDMA)、码分多址(CDMA)、时分多址(TDMA)、蓝牙、蓝牙低功耗(BTLE)、无线高保真(Wi-Fi)(例如,IEEE 802.11a、IEEE 802.11b、IEEE 802.11g、IEEE 802.11n和/或IEEE 802.11ac)、因特网协议语音(VoIP)、Wi-MAX、针对电子邮件的协议(例如,因特网消息访问协议(IMAP)和/或邮局协议(POP))、即时消息收发(例如,可扩展消息收发和现场协议(XMPP)、针对即时消息收发和现场平衡扩展的会话发起协议(SIMPLE)、即时消息收发和现场服务(IMPS))和/或短消息服务(SMS),或者任意其他适当的通信协议,包括在此文档递交日为止还未开发出的通信协议。RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and transmits RF signals, also known as electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals into/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with a communications network and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes known circuitry for performing these functions, including, but not limited to, an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and the like. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates wirelessly with, for example, the Internet, also known as the World Wide Web (WWW), intranets, and/or wireless networks such as cellular telephone networks, wireless local area networks (LANs), and/or metropolitan area networks (MANs), as well as other devices. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes known circuitry for detecting near-field communication (NFC) fields, such as via a short-range radio. Wireless communication may optionally use any of a variety of communication standards, protocols, and technologies, including, but not limited to, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA), Evolution Data Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), Near Field Communication (NFC), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11d), and/or IEEE 802.11e. 802.11ac), Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, protocols for email (e.g., Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) and/or Post Office Protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communications protocol, including communications protocols that have not been developed as of the filing date of this document.

音频电路装置110、扬声器111和麦克风113在用户与设备100之间提供音频接口。音频电路装置110从外围设备接口118接收音频数据,将该音频数据转换成电信号,并且向扬声器111传输该电信号。扬声器111将该电信号转换成人类可听见的声波。音频电路装置110还接收由麦克风113从声波转换的电信号。音频电路装置110将电信号转换成音频数据并且向外围设备接口118传输该音频数据用于处理。音频数据可以通过外围设备接口118从存储器102和/或RF电路装置108获取和/或向存储器102和/或RF电路装置108传输。在一些实施例中,音频电路装置110还包括耳机插孔(例如,图2中的212)。耳机插孔在音频电路装置110与可移除音频输入/输出外围设备(诸如只有输出的受话器或既能输出(例如,单耳或双耳的受话器)又能输入(例如,麦克风)的耳机)之间提供接口。The audio circuit device 110, the speaker 111, and the microphone 113 provide an audio interface between the user and the device 100. The audio circuit device 110 receives audio data from the peripheral device interface 118, converts the audio data into an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to the speaker 111. The speaker 111 converts the electrical signal into sound waves audible to humans. The audio circuit device 110 also receives the electrical signal converted from the sound wave by the microphone 113. The audio circuit device 110 converts the electrical signal into audio data and transmits the audio data to the peripheral device interface 118 for processing. The audio data can be obtained from the memory 102 and/or the RF circuit device 108 and/or transmitted to the memory 102 and/or the RF circuit device 108 via the peripheral device interface 118. In some embodiments, the audio circuit device 110 also includes a headphone jack (e.g., 212 in FIG. 2). The headphone jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and a removable audio input/output peripheral, such as output-only headphones or a headset capable of both output (eg, single or dual ear headphones) and input (eg, a microphone).

I/O子系统106将设备100上的输入/输出外围设备(诸如触摸屏112和其他输入控制设备116)耦合至外围设备接口118。I/O子系统106可选地包括显示器控制器156、光学传感器控制器158、强度传感器控制器159、触感反馈控制器161、以及针对其他输入或控制设备的一个或多个输入控制器160。该一个或多个输入控制器160从其他输入或控制设备116接收电信号/向其他输入或控制设备116发送电信号。其他输入或控制设备116可选地包括物理按钮(例如,下压按钮、摇杆按钮等)、拨号盘、滑动开关、操纵杆、点击式转盘等。在一些备选实施例中,(一个或多个)输入控制器160可选地被耦合至以下各项中的任意项(或没有):键盘、红外端口、USB端口以及诸如鼠标之类的定点设备。一个或多个按钮(例如,图2中的208)可选地包括针对扬声器111和/或麦克风113的音量控制的向上/向下按钮。所述一个或多个按钮可选地包括下压按钮(例如,图2中的206)。The I/O subsystem 106 couples the input/output peripherals on the device 100, such as the touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to a peripherals interface 118. The I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes a display controller 156, an optical sensor controller 158, an intensity sensor controller 159, a haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices 116. Other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slide switches, joysticks, click wheels, etc. In some alternative embodiments, the input controller(s) 160 are optionally coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointing device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208 in FIG2 ) optionally include up/down buttons for volume control of the speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206 in FIG2 ).

对下压按钮的快速按压可以脱离触摸屏112的锁定或者开始在触摸屏上使用手势以解锁设备的过程,如在2005年12月23日提交的第11/322,549号美国专利申请、第7,657,849号美国专利“Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image”中所述,其通过引用的方式整体并入于此。对下压按钮(例如,206)的较长按压可以使设备100通电或断电。用户可以能够自定义按钮中的一个或多个按钮的功能。触摸屏112被用来实现虚拟按钮或软按钮以及一个或多个软键盘。A quick press of the push button can unlock the touch screen 112 or begin the process of using gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application No. 11/322,549, filed December 23, 2005, and U.S. Patent No. 7,657,849, "Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image," which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 206) can power the device 100 on or off. The user can customize the function of one or more of the buttons. The touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

触敏显示器112在设备与用户之间提供输入接口和输出接口。显示器控制器156从触摸屏112接收电信号和/或向触摸屏112发送电信号。触摸屏112向用户显示视觉输出。该视觉输出可以包括图形、文本、图标、视频以及上述各项的任意组合(统称为“图形”)。在一些实施例中,一些或所有视觉输出可以对应于用户界面对象。The touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and the user. The display controller 156 receives electrical signals from the touch screen 112 and/or sends electrical signals to the touch screen 112. The touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output may include graphics, text, icons, videos, and any combination of the above (collectively referred to as "graphics"). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output may correspond to user interface objects.

触摸屏112具有基于触感(haptic)和/或触觉(tactile)接触而接受来自用户的输入的触敏表面、传感器或传感器集。触摸屏112和显示器控制器156(连同存储器102中任意相关联的模块和/或指令集)检测触摸屏112上的接触(以及接触的任意移动或中断),并且将检测到的接触转换成与在触摸屏112上显示的用户界面对象(例如,一个或多个软按键、图标、网页或图像)的交互。在一个示例性实施例中,触摸屏112与用户之间的接触点对应于用户的手指。The touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. The touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (together with any associated modules and/or instruction sets in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or interruption of contact) on the touch screen 112 and convert the detected contact into interaction with a user interface object (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) displayed on the touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, the point of contact between the touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to the user's finger.

触摸屏112可以使用LCD(液晶显示屏)技术、LPD(发光聚合物显示器)技术或LED(发光二极管)技术,但在其他实施例中也可以使用其他显示技术。触摸屏112和显示器控制器156可以使用现在已知或以后开发的多种触摸感测技术的任何一种来检测接触以及接触的任何移动或中断,这些触摸感测技术包括但不限于:电容、电阻、红外和表面声波技术,以及其他接近传感器阵列或用于确定与触摸屏112的一个或多个接触点的元件。在一个示例性实施例中,使用诸如可以在加利福尼亚州、库比蒂诺的Apple公司的和iPod中找到的投射式互电容感测技术。The touch screen 112 may use LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments. The touch screen 112 and display controller 156 may use any of a variety of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed to detect contact and any movement or interruption of contact, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or elements for determining one or more points of contact with the touch screen 112. In one exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology such as that found in Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California and iPod® is used.

在触摸屏112的一些实施例中,触敏显示器可以与在以下美国专利中描述的多点触摸敏感触摸板相似:6,323,846(Westerman等人),6,570,557(Westerman等人)、和/或6,677,932(Westerman),和/或美国专利公开2002/0015024A1,这些申请中的每个申请通过引用的方式将其整体并入于此。然而,触摸屏112显示来自设备100的视觉输出,而触敏触控板不提供视觉输出。In some embodiments of the touch screen 112, the touch-sensitive display may be similar to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in U.S. Patents 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. However, the touch screen 112 displays visual output from the device 100, whereas a touch-sensitive trackpad does not provide visual output.

触摸屏112的一些实施例中的触敏显示器可如以下申请中所描述:(1)2006年5月2日提交的第11/381,313号美国专利申请“Multipoint Touch Surface Controller”;(2)2004年5月6日提交的第10/840,862号美国专利申请“Multipoint Touchscreen”;(3)2004年7月30日提交的第10/903,964号美国专利申请“Gestures For Touch Sensitive InputDevices”;(4)2005年1月31日提交的第11/048,264号美国专利申请“Gestures For TouchSensitive Input Devices”;(5)2005年1月18日提交的第11/038,590号美国专利申请“Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices”;(6)2005年9月16日提交的第11/228,758号美国专利申请“Virtual Input Device PlacementOn A Touch Screen User Interface”;(7)2005年9月16日提交的第11/228,700号美国专利申请“Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface”;(8)2005年9月16日提交的第11/228,737号美国专利申请“Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-ScreenVirtual Keyboard”;以及(9)2006年3月3日提交的第11/367,749号美国专利申请“Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device”。所有这些申请都通过引用整体并入于此。The touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of the touch screen 112 may be as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. patent application No. 11/381,313, filed on May 2, 2006, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller”; (2) U.S. patent application No. 10/840,862, filed on May 6, 2004, “Multipoint Touchscreen”; (3) U.S. patent application No. 10/903,964, filed on July 30, 2004, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices”; (4) U.S. patent application No. 11/048,264, filed on January 31, 2005, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices”; (5) U.S. patent application No. 11/038,590, filed on January 18, 2005, “Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices”; (6) U.S. patent application No. 11/228,758, filed on September 16, 2005, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface”; (7) U.S. patent application No. 11/228,700, filed on September 16, 2005, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface”; (8) U.S. patent application No. 11/228,737, filed on September 16, 2005, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard”; and (9) U.S. patent application No. 11/367,749, filed on March 3, 2006, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device”. All of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

触摸屏112可以具有超过100dpi的视频分辨率。在一些实施例中,触摸屏具有大约160dpi的视频分辨率。用户可以使用诸如触笔、手指等之类的任何适当对象或附属物与触摸屏112进行接触。在一些实施例中,用户界面被设计成主要通过基于手指的接触和手势来工作,由于手指在触摸屏上的接触面积较大,因此基于手指接触和手势在精度上低于基于触笔的输入。在一些实施例中,设备将粗略的基于手指的输入翻译成精确的指针/光标位置或用于执行用户所期望的动作的命令。The touch screen 112 can have a video resolution exceeding 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user can use any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, finger, etc., to make contact with the touch screen 112. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to operate primarily through finger-based contacts and gestures, which are less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger contact area of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates rough finger-based input into precise pointer/cursor positions or commands for performing the action desired by the user.

在一些实施例中,除了触摸屏之外,设备100还可以包括用于激活或去激活特定功能的触摸板(未示出)。在一些实施例中,触摸板是与触摸屏不同的、不显示视觉输出的设备的触敏区域。触摸板可以是与触摸屏112分离的触敏表面或者是由触摸屏形成的触敏表面的延伸部分。In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 may also include a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating specific functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that does not display visual output, unlike the touch screen. The touchpad can be a touch-sensitive surface separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

设备100还包括用于对各种部件供电的电源系统162。电源系统162可以包括电源管理系统、一个或多个电源(例如,电池、交流电(AC))、充电系统、电源故障检测电路、电源转换器或反相器、电源状态指示器(例如,发光二极管(LED))、以及与便携式设备中的电源的生成、管理和分配有关的任何其他部件。The device 100 also includes a power system 162 for powering the various components. The power system 162 may include a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., batteries, alternating current (AC)), a charging system, power failure detection circuitry, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light emitting diode (LED)), and any other components related to the generation, management, and distribution of power in a portable device.

设备100还可以包括一个或多个光学传感器164。图1A示出了与I/O子系统106中的光学传感器的控制器158耦合的光学传感器。光学传感器164可以包括电荷耦合器件(CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(CMOS)光电晶体管。光学传感器164接收通过一个或多个透镜投射的来自环境的光,并且将光转换成代表图像的数据。与成像模块143(也被称作相机模块)相结合,光学传感器164可以捕获静态图像或视频。在一些实施例中,光学传感器位于设备100的背面,与设备正面的触摸屏显示器112相对,使得可以触摸屏显示器可以被用作静态和/或视频图像获取的取景器。在一些实施例中,光学传感器位于设备的正面,使得在用户查看触摸屏显示器上的其他视频会议参与者的同时,可以为视频会议获取用户图像。在一些实施例中,光学传感器164的位置能够由用户改变(例如,通过旋转设备外壳中的透镜和传感器),使得单个光学传感器164可以与触摸屏显示器一起使用以用于视频会议以及静态和/或视频图像获取两者。The device 100 may also include one or more optical sensors 164. FIG1A shows an optical sensor coupled to the optical sensor controller 158 in the I/O subsystem 106. The optical sensor 164 may include a charge-coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The optical sensor 164 receives ambient light projected through one or more lenses and converts the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with the imaging module 143 (also referred to as a camera module), the optical sensor 164 can capture still images or video. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the back of the device 100, opposite the touchscreen display 112 on the front of the device, so that the touchscreen display can be used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the front of the device, so that the user's image can be captured for video conferencing while viewing other video conference participants on the touchscreen display. In some embodiments, the position of the optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and sensor in the device housing), so that a single optical sensor 164 can be used with the touchscreen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.

设备100可选地还包括一个或者多个接触强度传感器165。图1A示出了耦合到I/O子系统106中的强度传感器控制器159的接触强度传感器。接触强度传感器165可选地包括一个或者多个压阻应变仪、电容力传感器、电力传感器(electric force sensor)、压电力传感器、光学力传感器、电容性触敏表面或者其他强度传感器(例如,用于在触敏表面上测量接触的力(或者压力)的传感器)。接触强度传感器165从环境接收接触强度信息(例如,压力信息或者用于压力信息的替代)。在一些实施例中,至少一个接触强度传感器与触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器系统112)并置或者接近触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器系统112)。在一些实施例中,至少一个接触强度传感器位于设备100的背面上,其与位于设备100的正面的触摸屏显示器112相对。Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact force sensors 165. Figure 1A shows contact force sensors coupled to force sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact force sensors 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other force sensors (e.g., sensors for measuring the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact force sensors 165 receive contact force information (e.g., pressure information or a substitute for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact force sensor is juxtaposed with or proximate to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact force sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 located on the front of device 100.

设备100还可以包括一个或多个接近传感器166。图1A示出了耦合至外围设备接口118的接近传感器166。备选地,接近传感器166可以被耦合至I/O子系统106中的输入控制器160。接近传感器166可以如以下美国专利申请所描述的来执行:第11/241,839号,“Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”;第11/240,788号,“Proximity Detector InHandheld Device”;第11/620,702号,“Using Ambient Light Sensor To AugmentProximity Sensor Output”;第11/586,862号,“Automated Response To And Sensing OfUser Activity In Portable Devices”;以及第11/638,251号,“Methods And SystemsFor Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals”,其通过引用的方式整体并入于此。在一些实施例中,当多功能设备处于用户的耳朵附近时(例如,当用户正在进行电话呼叫时),接近传感器关闭并且禁用触摸屏112。Device 100 may also include one or more proximity sensors 166. FIG1A shows a proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternatively, proximity sensor 166 may be coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Proximity sensor 166 may be implemented as described in U.S. patent applications No. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; No. 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; No. 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; No. 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and No. 11/638,251, “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals,” which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. In some embodiments, when the multifunction device is near the user's ear (eg, when the user is on a phone call), the proximity sensor turns off and disables the touch screen 112.

设备100可选地还包括一个或者多个触觉输出生成器167。图1A示出了耦合到I/O子系统106中的触感反馈控制器161的触觉输出生成器。触觉输出生成器167可选地包括一个或者多个电声设备(诸如,扬声器或者其他音频部件)和/或将能量转换成线性运动的机电设备(诸如,电机、螺线管、电活性聚合物、压电式致动器、静电致动器或者其他触觉输出生成部件(例如,将电信号转换成设备上的触觉输出的部件))。接触强度传感器165从触感反馈模块133接收触觉反馈生成指令,并且在设备100上生成能够由设备100的用户感觉的触觉输出。在一些实施例中,至少一个触觉输出生成器与触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器系统112)并置或者接近于触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器系统112),并且可选地通过垂直地(例如,设备100的表面中/外)或者横向地(在与设备100的表面相同的平面中往复)移动触敏表面来生成触觉输出。在一些实施例中,至少一个触觉输出生成器传感器位于设备100的背面,其与位于设备100的正面的触摸屏显示器112相对。Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. Figure 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled to a tactile feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices (such as speakers or other audio components) and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion (such as motors, solenoids, electroactive polymers, piezoelectric actuators, electrostatic actuators, or other tactile output generating components (e.g., components that convert electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device)). Contact force sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from tactile feedback module 133 and generates tactile output on device 100 that can be felt by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with or in proximity to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112), and optionally generates tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of the surface of device 100) or laterally (back and forth in the same plane as the surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 located on the front of device 100.

设备100还可以包括一个或多个加速度计168。图1A示出了耦合至外围设备接口118的加速度计168。备选地,加速度计168可以被耦合至I/O子系统106中的输入控制器160。加速度计168可以如以下美国专利公开来执行:第20050190059号,“Acceleration-basedTheft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices”以及第20060017692号,“Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On AnAccelerometer”,两篇专利公开都通过引用的方式整体并入于此。在一些实施例中,基于对从一个或多个加速度计接收的数据的分析而以纵向视图或者横向视图将信息显示在触摸屏显示器上。除了(一个或多个)加速度计168之外,设备100还可选地包括磁力计(未示出)和GPS(或者GLONASS或者其他全球导航系统)接收器(未示出),以用于获得与设备100的位置和定向(例如,纵向或横向)有关的信息。Device 100 may also include one or more accelerometers 168. FIG1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternatively, accelerometer 168 may be coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Accelerometer 168 may be implemented as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on analysis of data received from one or more accelerometers. In addition to the accelerometer(s) 168 , the device 100 optionally includes a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information regarding the position and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of the device 100 .

在一些实施例中,存储在存储器102中的软件部件包括操作系统126、通信模块(或指令集)128、接触/运动模块(或指令集)130、图形模块(或指令集)132、文本输入模块(或指令集)134、全球定位系统(GPS)模块(或指令集)135以及应用(或指令集)136。此外,如图1A和图3所示,在一些实施例中,存储器102(图1A)或者存储器370(图3)存储设备/全局内部状态157。设备/全局内部状态157包括以下各项中的一个或多个:活跃应用状态,指示哪些应用程序(如果有的话)当前是活跃的;显示器状态,指示什么应用、视图和其他信息占用触摸屏显示器112的各个区域;传感器状态,包括从设备的各个传感器和输入控制设备116获得的信息;以及与设备的位置和/或姿态有关的位置信息。In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include an operating system 126, a communication module (or instruction set) 128, a contact/motion module (or instruction set) 130, a graphics module (or instruction set) 132, a text input module (or instruction set) 134, a global positioning system (GPS) module (or instruction set) 135, and an application (or instruction set) 136. In addition, as shown in Figures 1A and 3, in some embodiments, memory 102 (Figure 1A) or memory 370 (Figure 3) stores a device/global internal state 157. The device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of the following: an active application state, indicating which applications (if any) are currently active; a display state, indicating what applications, views, and other information occupy various areas of the touch screen display 112; a sensor state, including information obtained from various sensors and input control devices 116 of the device; and position information related to the position and/or posture of the device.

操作系统126(例如,Darwin、RTXC、LINUX、UNIX、OS X、iOS、WINDOWS、或者诸如VxWorks的嵌入式操作系统)包括用于控制和管理一般系统任务(例如,存储器管理、存储设备控制、电源管理等)的各种软件部件和/或驱动器,并且促使各种硬件与软件部件之间的通信。The operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

通信模块128在一个或多个外部端口124上促进与其他设备的通信,并且还包括用于处理通过RF电路装置108和/或外部端口124接收的数据的各种软件部件。外部端口124(例如,通用串行总线(USB)、火线(FIREWIRE)等)适于直接地耦合至其他设备或通过网络(例如,因特网、无线LAN等)间接地耦合至其他设备。在一些实施例中,外部端口是与用在(Apple公司的商标)设备上的30引脚连接器相同、相似和/或兼容的多引脚(例如,30引脚)连接器。Communications module 128 facilitates communications with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for processing data received through RF circuitry 108 and/or external ports 124. External ports 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FireWire, etc.) are suitable for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly to other devices via a network (e.g., the Internet, a wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, similar to, and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

接触/运动模块130可选地检测与触摸屏112(与显示器控制器156相结合)和其他触敏设备(例如,触摸板或物理点击式转盘)的接触。接触/运动模块130包括用于执行与接触的检测相关的各种操作的各种软件部件,诸如确定是否发生了接触(例如,检测手指向下事件),确定接触的强度(例如,接触的力或者压力,或者用于接触的力或者压力的替代),确定是否存在接触的移动并且跟踪跨触敏表面的移动(例如,检测一个或多个手指拖拽事件),以及确定接触是否已停止(例如,检测手指向上事件或接触中断)。接触/运动模块130从触敏表面接收接触数据。确定触点的移动(其由一系列接触数据所表示)可选地包括确定触点的速率(幅度)、速度(幅度和方向)、和/或加速度(幅度和/或方向上的变化)。这些操作可选地应用于单个接触(例如,一个手指接触),或者多个同时接触(例如,“多点触摸”/多个手指接触)。在一些实施例中,接触/运动模块130和显示器控制器156检测触摸板上的接触。The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with the touch screen 112 (in conjunction with the display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). The contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to the detection of contact, such as determining whether contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining the intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact, or a proxy for force or pressure of the contact), determining whether there has been movement of the contact and tracking movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger drag events), and determining whether the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or contact break). The contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining the movement of the contact (represented by a sequence of contact data) optionally includes determining the rate (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or acceleration (change in magnitude and/or direction) of the contact. These operations optionally apply to a single contact (e.g., a one-finger contact) or multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., "multi-touch"/multiple-finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.

在一些实施例中,接触/运动模块130使用一个或者多个强度阈值的集合来确定操作是否已经由用户执行(例如,确定用户是否已经“点击”图标)。在一些实施例中,根据软件参数来确定强度阈值的至少一个子集(例如,强度阈值不是由特定的物理致动器的激活阈值来确定,并且在不改变设备100的物理硬件的情况下进行调整)。例如,在不改变触控板或者触摸屏显示器硬件的情况下,触摸板或者触摸屏的鼠标“点击”阈值可以被设置为任何大范围的预定阈值。此外,在一些实施例中,设备的用户被提供有用于调整强度阈值的集合中一个或者多个强度阈值的软件设置(例如,通过利用系统级点击“强度”参数来一次性调整单个和/或多个强度阈值)。In some embodiments, the contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has "clicked" an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined based on software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation threshold of a particular physical actuator and are adjusted without changing the physical hardware of the device 100). For example, a mouse "click" threshold for a touchpad or touchscreen can be set to any of a wide range of predetermined thresholds without changing the touchpad or touchscreen display hardware. In addition, in some embodiments, a user of the device is provided with a software setting for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by utilizing a system-level click "intensity" parameter to adjust single and/or multiple intensity thresholds at once).

接触/运动模块130可选地检测由用户输入的手势。触敏表面上不同的手势具有不同的接触模式(例如,不同的运动、计时和/或检测到的接触的强度)。因此,手势可选地通过检测特定接触模式来检测。例如,检测手指叩击手势包括:检测手指向下事件、随后是在与该手指向下事件(例如,在图标位置)相同的位置(或者基本上相同的位置)检测手指向上(例如,抬起)事件。作为另一示例,检测触摸表面上的手指轻扫(swipe)手势包括:检测手指向下事件、随后是检测一个或多个手指拖拽事件、再随后是检测手指向上(抬起)事件。Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects gestures input by the user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, gestures are optionally detected by detecting specific contact patterns. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger down event followed by detecting a finger up (e.g., lift) event at the same location (or substantially the same location) as the finger down event (e.g., at an icon location). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch surface includes detecting a finger down event followed by detecting one or more finger drag events followed by detecting a finger up (lift) event.

图形模块132包括用于在触摸屏112或其他显示器上渲染和显示图形的各种已知软件部件,包括用于改变所显示图形的视觉效果(例如,亮度、透明度、饱和度、对比度或者其他视觉属性)的部件。如本文所使用的,术语“图形”包括可以向用户显示的任何对象,包括但不限于:文本、网页、图标(诸如包括软按键的用户界面对象)、数字图像、视频、动画等。The graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on the touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual effects (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual attributes) of the displayed graphics. As used herein, the term "graphics" includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including but not limited to: text, web pages, icons (such as user interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, etc.

在一些实施例中,图形模块132存储表示待使用图形的数据。每个图形被可选地分配对应的代码。图形模块132从应用等接收指定待显示图形的一个或多个代码,连同(如果有需要)坐标数据和其他图形属性数据,然后生成屏幕图像数据以向显示器控制器156输出。In some embodiments, the graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. The graphics module 132 receives one or more codes specifying the graphics to be displayed from an application or the like, along with coordinate data and other graphic attribute data, if necessary, and then generates screen image data for output to the display controller 156.

触感反馈模块133包括各种软件部件,该软件部件用于响应于与设备100的用户交互,生成由(一个或多个)触觉输出生成器167用来在设备上的一个或者多个位置处产生触觉输出的指令。Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile output at one or more locations on the device in response to user interaction with device 100 .

文本输入模块134(其可以是图形模块132的部件)提供用于将文本录入各种应用中(例如,联系人137、电子邮件140、IM 141、浏览器147和需要文本输入的任何其他应用)的软键盘。Text input module 134 (which may be a component of graphics module 132) provides a soft keyboard for entering text into various applications (eg, contacts 137, email 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application requiring text input).

GPS模块135确定设备的位置,并且提供此信息供各种应用使用(例如,提供给电话138,用于在基于位置的拨号中使用;提供给相机143作为图片/视频元数据;以及提供给提供基于位置的服务的应用,诸如天气微件、本地黄页微件、和地图/导航微件)。The GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use by various applications (e.g., to the phone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to the camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services, such as weather widgets, local yellow pages widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

应用136可以包括以下模块(或指令集)、或其子集或超集:Application 136 may include the following modules (or instruction sets), or a subset or superset thereof:

·联系人模块137(有时被称作地址簿或联系人列表);Contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);

·电话模块138;Telephone module 138;

·视频会议模块139;Video conferencing module 139;

·电子邮件客户端模块140Email client module 140

·即时消息收发(IM)模块141;Instant messaging (IM) module 141;

·锻炼支持模块142;Exercise support module 142;

·用于静态和/或视频图像的相机模块143;A camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

·图像管理模块144;Image management module 144;

·视频播放器模块;Video player module;

·音乐播放器模块;Music player module;

·浏览器模块147;Browser module 147;

·日历模块148;Calendar module 148;

·微件模块149,其可以包括以下各项中的一个或多个:天气微件149-1、股票微件149-2、计算器微件149-3、闹钟微件149-4、词典微件149-5、以及由用户获得的其他微件,以及用户创建的微件149-6;微件创建器模块150,用于制作用户创建的微件149-6;Widget module 149, which may include one or more of the following: a weather widget 149-1, a stock widget 149-2, a calculator widget 149-3, an alarm clock widget 149-4, a dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as a user-created widget 149-6; a widget creator module 150 for creating the user-created widget 149-6;

·搜索模块151;Search module 151;

·视频和音乐播放器模块152,其合并视频播放器模块和音乐播放器模块;Video and music player module 152, which combines the video player module and the music player module;

·备忘录模块153;Memo module 153;

·地图模块154;和/或Map module 154; and/or

·在线视频模块155。Online video module 155.

可以存储在存储器102中的其他应用136的示例包括其他文字处理应用、其他图像编辑应用、绘图应用、演示应用、支持JAVA功能的应用、加密、数字权限管理、语音识别和语音复制。Examples of other applications 136 that may be stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,联系人模块137可以用于管理地址簿或联系人列表(例如,存储在存储器102或存储器370中的联系人模块137的应用内部状态192中),包括:将(一个或多个)姓名添加到地址簿中;从地址簿中删除(一个或多个)姓名;将(一个或多个)电话号码、(一个或多个)电子邮件地址、(一个或多个)物理地址或其他信息与姓名相关联;将图像与姓名相关联;对姓名进行分类和排序;提供电话号码或电子邮件地址以发起和/或促进通过电话138、视频会议模块139、电子邮件140或IM 141的通信等。In combination with the touch screen 112, display controller 156, touch/motion module 130, graphics module 132 and text input module 134, the contacts module 137 can be used to manage an address book or contact list (for example, stored in the application internal state 192 of the contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding (one or more) names to the address book; deleting (one or more) names from the address book; associating (one or more) phone numbers, (one or more) email addresses, (one or more) physical addresses or other information with a name; associating images with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing phone numbers or email addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications via telephone 138, video conferencing module 139, email 140 or IM 141, etc.

结合RF电路装置108、音频电路装置110、扬声器111、麦克风113、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,电话模块138可以用于录入对应于电话号码的字符序列、访问联系人模块137中的一个或多个电话号码、修改已经录入的电话号码、拨打相应的电话号码、进行会话以及当会话完成时断开连接或挂断。如上所述,无线通信可以使用多种通信标准、协议和技术中的任何一种。In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, phone module 138 can be used to enter a character sequence corresponding to a phone number, access one or more phone numbers in contact module 137, modify an already entered phone number, dial a corresponding phone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is complete. As described above, wireless communication can use any of a variety of communication standards, protocols, and technologies.

结合RF电路装置108、音频电路装置110、扬声器111、麦克风113、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、光学传感器164、光学传感器的控制器158、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、联系人模块137和电话模块138,视频会议模块139包括用于根据用户指令发起、进行和终止用户与一个或多个其他参与者之间的视频会议的可执行指令。In combination with the RF circuit device 108, the audio circuit device 110, the speaker 111, the microphone 113, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the optical sensor 164, the controller of the optical sensor 158, the touch/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the contact module 137 and the telephone module 138, the video conferencing module 139 includes executable instructions for initiating, conducting and terminating a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,电子邮件客户端模块140包括用于响应于用户指令创建、发送、接收和管理电子邮件的可执行指令。结合图像管理模块144,电子邮件客户端模块140使创建和发送带有利用相机模块143拍摄的静态或视频图像的电子邮件变得非常容易。In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, touch/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, email client module 140 includes executable instructions for creating, sending, receiving, and managing emails in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, email client module 140 makes it easy to create and send emails with still or video images captured using camera module 143.

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,即时消息收发模块141包括用于录入对应于即时消息的字符序列、用于修改先前录入的字符、用于传输相应的即时消息(例如,使用短消息服务(SMS)或多媒体消息服务(MMS)协议以用于基于电话的即时消息,或者使用XMPP、SIMPLE或IMPS以用于基于因特网的即时消息)、用于接收即时消息和查看所接收的即时消息的可执行指令。在一些实施例中,如MMS和/或增强型消息收发服务(EMS)所支持的那样,所传输和/或所接收的即时消息可以包括图形、照片、音频文件、视频文件和/或其他附件。如本文中所使用的,“即时消息收发”指代基于电话的消息(例如,使用SMS或MMS发送的消息)和基于因特网的消息(例如,使用XMPP、SIMPLE或IMPS的消息)。In conjunction with the RF circuitry 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, and the text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions for entering a character sequence corresponding to an instant message, for modifying previously entered characters, for transmitting a corresponding instant message (e.g., using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for phone-based instant messaging, or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messaging), for receiving instant messages, and for viewing received instant messages. In some embodiments, as supported by MMS and/or Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS), the transmitted and/or received instant messages may include graphics, photos, audio files, video files, and/or other attachments. As used herein, "instant messaging" refers to both phone-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、GPS模块135、地图模块154和音乐播放器模块,锻炼支持模块142包括用于创建锻炼(例如,具有时间、距离和/或卡路里燃烧目标);与锻炼传感器(运动设备)通信;接收锻炼传感器数据;校准用于监视锻炼的传感器;选择并且播放用于锻炼的音乐;以及显示、存储并且传输锻炼数据的可执行指令。In combination with the RF circuit device 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the GPS module 135, the map module 154, and the music player module, the workout support module 142 includes executable instructions for creating workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burn goals); communicating with workout sensors (exercise equipment); receiving workout sensor data; calibrating sensors for monitoring a workout; selecting and playing music for a workout; and displaying, storing, and transmitting workout data.

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、(一个或多个)光学传感器164、光学传感器的控制器158、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和图像管理模块144,相机模块143包括用于捕获静态图像或视频(包括视频流)并且将它们存储到存储器102中,修改静态图像或视频的特性,或者从存储器102中删除静态图像或视频的可执行指令。In combination with the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the optical sensor(s) 164, the optical sensor controller 158, the touch/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, and the image management module 144, the camera module 143 includes executable instructions for capturing still images or videos (including video streams) and storing them in the memory 102, modifying the characteristics of the still images or videos, or deleting the still images or videos from the memory 102.

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134和相机模块143,图像管理模块144包括用于布置、修改(例如,编辑)、或操纵、标注、删除、呈现(例如,在数字幻灯片演示或相册中)、以及存储静态和/或视频图像的可执行指令。In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, touch/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions for arranging, modifying (e.g., editing), or manipulating, annotating, deleting, presenting (e.g., in a digital slide show or photo album), and storing still and/or video images.

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,浏览器模块147包括用于根据用户指令浏览因特网(包括搜索、链接、接收和显示网页或网页的多个部分以及与被链接到网页的附件和其他文件)的可执行指令。In combination with the RF circuit device 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the touch/motion module 130, the graphics module 132 and the text input module 134, the browser module 147 includes executable instructions for browsing the Internet in accordance with user instructions (including searching, linking, receiving and displaying web pages or multiple parts of web pages and attachments and other files linked to the web pages).

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、电子邮件客户端模块140和浏览器模块147,日历模块148包括用于根据用户指令创建、显示、修改和存储日历和与日历相关联的数据(例如,日历条目、待办事项列表等)的可执行指令。In combination with the RF circuit device 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the touch/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the email client module 140 and the browser module 147, the calendar module 148 includes executable instructions for creating, displaying, modifying and storing calendars and data associated with the calendar (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134和浏览器模块147,微件模块149是可以由用户下载和使用的小型应用(例如,天气微件149-1、股票微件149-2、计算器微件149-3、闹钟微件149-4和词典微件149-5),或者由用户创建的小型应用(例如,用户创建的微件149-6)。在一些实施例中,微件包括HTML(超文本标记语言)文件、CSS(层叠样式表)文件和JavaScript文件。在一些实施例中,微件包括XML(可扩充标记语言)文件和JavaScript文件(例如,Yahoo!微件)。In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget module 149 is a small application that can be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stock widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5), or a small application created by a user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., a Yahoo! widget).

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134和浏览器模块147,微件创建器模块150可以由用户用于创建微件(例如,将网页的用户指定部分转变成微件)。In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, touch/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget creator module 150 may be used by a user to create widgets (e.g., convert a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,搜索模块151包括用于根据用户指示搜索存储器102中与一条或多条搜索准则(例如,一个或多个用户指定的搜索项)匹配的文本、音乐、声音、图像、视频和/或其他文件的可执行指令。In combination with the touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132 and text input module 134, the search module 151 includes executable instructions for searching the memory 102 for text, music, sound, images, video and/or other files that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、音频电路装置110、扬声器111,RF电路装置108以及浏览器模块147,视频和音乐播放器模块152包括允许用户下载和回放录制的音乐以及以一个或多个文件格式存储的其他声音文件(诸如MP3或AAC文件)的可执行指令,并且包括用于(例如,在触摸屏112上或在经由外部端口124外部连接的显示器上)显示、呈现或者另外回放视频的可执行指令。在一些实施例中,设备100可选地包括诸如iPod(Apple公司的商标)的MP3播放器的功能。In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow a user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats (such as MP3 or AAC files), and includes executable instructions for displaying, presenting, or otherwise playing back video (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on a display connected externally via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,备忘录模块153包括根据用户指示创建并管理备忘录、待办事项列表等的可执行指令。In conjunction with the touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the memo module 153 includes executable instructions for creating and managing memos, to-do lists, etc. according to user instructions.

结合RF电路装置108、触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、GPS模块135和浏览器模块147,地图模块154可以用于根据用户指示接收、显示、修改和存储地图以及与地图相关联的数据(例如,驾驶方向;关于在特定位置或附近的商店及其他兴趣点的数据;以及其他基于位置的数据)。In combination with the RF circuit device 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the touch/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the GPS module 135 and the browser module 147, the map module 154 can be used to receive, display, modify and store maps and data associated with the maps (e.g., driving directions; data about stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

结合触摸屏112、显示器控制器156、接触/运动模块130、图形模块132、音频电路装置110、扬声器111、RF电路装置108、文本输入模块134、电子邮件客户端模块140和浏览器模块147,在线视频模块155包括允许用户访问、浏览、接收(例如,通过流传输和/或下载)、(例如,在触摸屏上或在经由外部端口124外部连接的显示器上)回放特定在线视频、发送具有到特定在线视频链接的电子邮件并且管理诸如H.264之类的一个或多个文件格式的在线视频的指令。在一些实施例中,即时消息收发模块141而不是电子邮件客户端模块140被用于发送到特定在线视频的链接。在线视频应用的附加描述可以在以下专利申请中找到:2007年6月20日提交的第60/936,562号美国临时专利申请“Portable Multifunction Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos”,以及2007年12月31日提交的第11/968,067号美国专利申请“Portable Multifunction Device,Method,andGraphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,”,其内容通过引用整体并入于此。In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes instructions that allow a user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or downloading), play back a particular online video (e.g., on the touch screen or on a display connected externally via external port 124), send an email with a link to a particular online video, and manage online videos in one or more file formats such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than email client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional descriptions of online video applications can be found in the following patent applications: U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, filed on June 20, 2007, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," and U.S. Patent Application No. 11/968,067, filed on December 31, 2007, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

上述模块和应用的每一个均对应于用于执行上文所述的一个或多个功能以及本申请中描述的方法(例如,本文所述的计算机实现方法以及其他信息处理方法)的指令集。这些模块(例如,指令集)不需要作为单独的软件程序、过程或模块来实现,因此这些模块的各种子集可以在各实施例中组合或者重新布置。例如,视频播放器模块可以与音乐播放器模块组合为单个模块(例如,图1A的视频和音乐播放器模块152)。在一些实施例中,存储器102可以存储上述模块和数据结构的子集。此外,存储器102可以存储上文未描述的其他模块和数据结构。Each of the above modules and applications corresponds to an instruction set for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., instruction sets) do not need to be implemented as separate software programs, processes, or modules, so various subsets of these modules can be combined or rearranged in various embodiments. For example, a video player module can be combined with a music player module into a single module (e.g., the video and music player module 152 of FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, memory 102 can store a subset of the above modules and data structures. In addition, memory 102 can store other modules and data structures not described above.

在一些实施例中,设备100是专门通过触摸屏和/或触摸板来执行设备上的预定义的功能集合的操作的设备。通过将触摸屏和/或触摸板用作操作设备100的主要输入控制设备,可以减少设备100上的物理输入控制设备(诸如下压按钮、拨号盘等)的数目。In some embodiments, the device 100 is a device that is dedicated to performing operations of a predefined set of functions on the device through a touch screen and/or a touch pad. By using the touch screen and/or the touch pad as the primary input control device for operating the device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, etc.) on the device 100 can be reduced.

专门通过触摸屏和/或触摸板执行的该预定义的功能集合可选地包括用户界面之间的导航。在一些实施例中,当被用户触摸时,触摸板将设备100从在设备100显示上的任意用户界面导航到主屏幕、主画面或根菜单。在此类实施例中,“菜单按钮”使用触摸板进行实施。在一些其他实施例中,菜单按钮是物理下压按钮或其他物理输入控制设备而不是触摸板。The predefined set of functions performed exclusively via the touch screen and/or touchpad optionally includes navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates the device 100 from any user interface displayed on the device 100 to a home screen, home screen, or root menu. In such embodiments, the "menu button" is implemented using the touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device rather than a touchpad.

图1B是图示根据一些实施例用于事件处理的示例性部件的框图。在一些实施例中,存储器102(在图1A)或存储器370(图3)包括事件分类器170(例如,在操作系统126中)和相应的应用136-1(例如,任意前述应用137-151、155、380-390)。FIG1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event processing according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in FIG1A ) or memory 370 ( FIG3 ) includes an event classifier 170 (e.g., in operating system 126 ) and a corresponding application 136 - 1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137 - 151 , 155 , 380 - 390 ).

事件分类器170接收事件信息,并且确定应用136-1以及应用136-1中向其递送该事件信息的应用视图191。事件分类器170包括事件监视器171和事件分派器(eventdispatcher)模块174。在一些实施例中,应用136-1包括应用内部状态192,其指示当应用活跃或正在执行时触敏显示器112上显示的(一个或多个)当前应用视图。在一些实施例中,设备/全局内容状态157由事件分类器170用于确定哪个哪些应用当前是活跃的,并且应用内部状态192由事件分类器170用于确定向其递送事件信息的应用视图191。Event classifier 170 receives event information and determines application 136-1 and an application view 191 in application 136-1 to which the event information is delivered. Event classifier 170 includes an event monitor 171 and an event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes an application internal state 192 that indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global content state 157 is used by event classifier 170 to determine which applications are currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event classifier 170 to determine the application view 191 to which the event information is delivered.

在一些实施例中,应用内部状态192包括附加信息,诸如以下各项中的一个或多个:当应用136-1恢复执行时要使用的恢复信息,指示应用136-1正在显示或准备显示的信息的用户界面状态信息,使用户能够回到应用136-1的前一状态或视图的状态队列,以及由用户采取的先前动作的重做/撤销队列。In some embodiments, the application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of the following: resume information to be used when the application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information indicating information that the application 136-1 is displaying or preparing to display, a state queue that enables the user to return to a previous state or view of the application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

事件监视器171从外围设备接口118接收事件信息。事件信息包括关于子事件(例如,作为多点触摸手势的一部分的触敏显示器112上的用户触摸)的信息。外围设备接口118传输其从I/O子系统106或传感器,诸如接近传感器166、(一个或多个)加速度计168和/或麦克风113(通过音频电路装置110)接收的信息。外围设备接口118从I/O子系统106接收的信息包括来自触敏显示器112或触敏表面的信息。Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. The event information includes information about sub-events (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or sensors such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). The information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

在一些实施例中,事件监视器171以预定间隔向外围设备接口118发送请求。作为响应,外围设备接口118发送事件信息。在其他实施例中,只在发生重要事件(例如,接收到超过预定噪声阈值和/或长于预定持续时间的输入)时,外围设备接口118才发送事件信息。In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 sends event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 sends event information only when a significant event occurs (e.g., receiving an input that exceeds a predetermined noise threshold and/or is longer than a predetermined duration).

在一些实施例中,事件分类器170还包括命中视图确定模块172和/或活跃事件识别器确定模块173。In some embodiments, event classifier 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event identifier determination module 173 .

命中视图确定模块172提供用于在触敏显示器112显示多于一个视图时,确定子事件已经在一个或多个视图中何处发生的软件程序。视图由用户在显示器上可以看到的控件和其他元件组成。Hit view determination module 172 provides software routines for determining where a sub-event has occurred in one or more views when touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. A view consists of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

与应用相关联的用户界面的另一方面是一组视图,在本文中有时被称为应用视图或用户界面窗口,其中显示信息并且发生基于触摸的手势。其中检测到触摸的(相应应用的)应用视图可以对应于该应用的程序或视图层次结构中的程序层级。例如,在其中检测到触摸的最低层级视图可被称为命中视图,并且可以至少部分基于开始基于触摸的手势的初始触摸的命中视图,来确定被识别为正确输入的事件集。Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application view (of the respective application) in which a touch is detected can correspond to a programmatic level in the programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest-level view in which a touch is detected can be referred to as a hit view, and the set of events recognized as correct input can be determined based at least in part on the hit view of the initial touch that initiated the touch-based gesture.

命中视图确定模块172接收与基于触摸的手势的子事件有关的信息。当应用具有以层次结构组织的多个视图时,命中视图确定模块172将该层次结构中应当处理该子事件的最低层视图标识为命中视图。在大部分情况下,命中视图是其中发生了发起子事件(例如,子事件序列中形成事件或潜在事件的第一个子事件)的最低层级的视图。一旦由命中视图确定模块172标识命中视图,该命中视图通常接收与使其被标识为命中视图的相同触摸或输入源有关的所有子事件。Hit view determination module 172 receives information about sub-events of touch-based gestures. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies the lowest-level view in the hierarchy that should handle the sub-event as the hit view. In most cases, the hit view is the lowest-level view in which the initiating sub-event (e.g., the first sub-event in a sequence of sub-events that forms an event or potential event) occurs. Once a hit view is identified by hit view determination module 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source that caused it to be identified as the hit view.

活跃事件识别器确定模块173确定视图层次结构中的哪个视图或哪些视图应当接收特定子事件序列。在一些实施例中,活跃事件识别器确定模块173确定只有命中视图应当接收特定子事件序列。在其他实施例中,活跃事件识别器确定模块173确定包括子事件的物理位置在内的所有视图都是主动参与的视图,并且因此确定所有主动参与的视图都应当接收特定子事件序列。在其他实施例中,即使触摸子事件被完全限定到与一个特定视图相关联的区域,层次结构中更高的视图将仍然保持作为主动参与的视图。Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views in the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views, including the physical location of the sub-event, are actively participating views, and therefore determines that all actively participating views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if a touch sub-event is completely confined to an area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy will still remain as actively participating views.

事件分派器模块174将事件信息分派至事件识别器(例如,事件识别器180)。在包括活跃事件识别器确定模块173的实施例中,事件分派器模块174将事件信息递送至由活跃事件识别器确定模块173确定的事件识别器。在一些实施例中,事件分派器模块174将事件信息存储在事件队列中,由相应的事件接收器182进行检索。Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments that include active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to the event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores the event information in an event queue for retrieval by corresponding event receiver 182.

在一些实施例中,操作系统126包括事件分类器170。备选地,应用136-1包括事件分类器170。在其他实施例中,事件分类器170是单独模块,或者是存储器102中存储的另一模块(诸如接触/运动模块130)的一部分。In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event classifier 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event classifier 170. In other embodiments, event classifier 170 is a separate module or part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

在一些实施例中,应用136-1包括多个事件处理机190以及一个或多个应用视图191,其中每一个都包括用于处理发生在该应用的用户界面的相应视图内的触摸事件的指令。应用136-1的每个应用视图191包括一个或多个事件识别器180。通常,相应的应用视图191包括多个事件识别器180。在其他实施例中,一个或多个事件识别器180是单独模块(诸如用户界面套件(未示出))的一部分,或者应用136-1从中继承方法和其他属性的更高层对象。在一些实施例中,相应事件处理机190包括以下各项中的一个或多个:数据更新器176、对象更新器177、GUI更新器178和/或从事件分类器170接收的事件数据179。事件处理机190可以利用或调用数据更新器176、对象更新器177或GUI更新器178来更新应用内部状态192。备选地,应用视图191中的一个或多个包括一个或多个相应事件处理机190。同样,在一些实施例中,数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178中的一个或多个包括在相应的应用视图191中。In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes multiple event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events occurring within a corresponding view of the user interface of the application. Each application view 191 of application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a corresponding application view 191 includes multiple event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module (such as a user interface kit (not shown)), or a higher-level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a corresponding event handler 190 includes one or more of the following: a data updater 176, an object updater 177, a GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from an event classifier 170. Event handler 190 can utilize or call data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more corresponding event handlers 190. Likewise, in some embodiments, one or more of the data updater 176 , the object updater 177 , and the GUI updater 178 are included in a corresponding application view 191 .

相应的事件识别器180从事件分类器170接收事件信息(例如,事件数据179),并基于该事件信息标识事件。事件识别器180包括事件接收器182和事件比较器184。在一些实施例中,事件识别器180还包括至少以下各项的子集:元数据183和事件递送指令188(其可以包括子事件递送指令)。A corresponding event identifier 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event classifier 170 and identifies an event based on the event information. Event identifier 180 includes an event receiver 182 and an event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event identifier 180 also includes at least a subset of the following: metadata 183 and event delivery instructions 188 (which may include sub-event delivery instructions).

事件接收器182从事件分类器170接收事件信息。该事件信息包括关于子事件(例如,触摸或触摸移动)的信息。取决于子事件,事件信息还包括附加信息,诸如子事件的位置。当子事件涉及触摸的运动时,事件信息还可以包括子事件的速率和方向。在一些实施例中,事件包括设备从一个定向到另一个定向的旋转(例如,从纵向到横向的旋转,反之亦然),并且事件信息包括关于设备的当前定向(也被称作设备姿态)的对应信息。Event receiver 182 receives event information from event classifier 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a touch or touch movement). Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as the location of the sub-event. When the sub-event involves the movement of a touch, the event information may also include the rate and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the event includes a rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from portrait to landscape, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation of the device (also referred to as the device posture).

事件比较器184将事件信息与预定义的事件或子事件定义进行比较,并且基于该比较来确定事件或子事件,或者确定或更新事件或子事件的状态。在一些实施例中,事件比较器184包括事件定义186。该事件定义186包含事件(例如,预定义的子事件序列)的定义,例如,事件1(187-1)、事件2(187-2)等等。在一些实施例中,事件187中的子事件例如包括触摸开始、触摸结束、触摸移动、触摸取消和多点触摸。在一个示例中,事件1(187-1)的定义是对显示对象的双叩击。该双叩击例如包括对显示对象的、预定阶段的第一触摸(触摸开始)、预定阶段的第一抬起(触摸结束)、对显示对象的、预定阶段的第二触摸(触摸开始)以及预定阶段的第二抬起(触摸结束)。在另一示例中,事件2(187-2)的定义是对显示对象的拖拽。该拖拽例如包括对显示对象的、预定阶段的触摸(或接触)、该触摸在触敏显示器112上的移动以及触摸的抬起(触摸结束)。在一些实施例中,事件还包括用于一个或多个相关联的事件处理机190的信息。Event comparator 184 compares event information with predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 include definitions of events (e.g., a predefined sequence of sub-events), such as event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and so on. In some embodiments, sub-events in event 187 include, for example, touch start, touch end, touch move, touch cancel, and multi-touch. In one example, event 1 (187-1) is defined as a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, includes a first touch (touch start) of a predetermined phase on the displayed object, a first lift (touch end) of a predetermined phase on the displayed object, a second touch (touch start) of a predetermined phase on the displayed object, and a second lift (touch end) of a predetermined phase on the displayed object. In another example, event 2 (187-2) is defined as a drag on a displayed object. The drag, for example, includes a touch (or contact) of a predetermined phase on the displayed object, movement of the touch on the touch-sensitive display 112, and lift (touch end) of the touch. In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190 .

在一些实施例中,事件定义187包括针对相应用户界面对象的事件的定义。在一些实施例中,事件比较器184执行命中测试,以确定与子事件相关联的用户界面对象。例如,在其中三个用户界面对象被显示在触敏显示器112上的应用视图中,当在触敏显示器112上检测到触摸时,事件比较器184执行命中测试,以确定三个用户界面对象中的哪个用户界面对象与该触摸(子事件)相关联。如果每个显示对象均与相应的事件处理机190相关联,则事件比较器使用该命中测试的结果来确定哪个事件处理机190应当被激活。例如,事件比较器184选择与触发该命中测试的子事件和对象相关联的事件处理机。In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes definitions of events for corresponding user interface objects. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine the user interface object associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a corresponding event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects the event handler associated with the sub-event and object that triggered the hit test.

在一些实施例中,相应事件(187)的定义还包括延迟动作,其延迟事件信息的递送,直到已经确定子事件序列是否与事件识别器的事件类型相对应。In some embodiments, the definition of the corresponding event (187) also includes a delay action that delays delivery of the event information until it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events corresponds to the event type of the event identifier.

当相应事件识别器180确定子事件序列不与事件定义186中的任意事件匹配时,该相应的事件识别器180进入事件不可能、事件失败或者事件结束状态,此后该相应的事件识别器180忽视基于触摸的手势的后续子事件。在此情况下,对于命中视图保持活跃的其他事件识别器(如果有的话),继续跟踪和处理正在进行的基于触摸的手势的子事件。When a corresponding event recognizer 180 determines that a sub-event sequence does not match any event in event definition 186, the corresponding event recognizer 180 enters the event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which the corresponding event recognizer 180 ignores subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this case, other event recognizers (if any) that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of the ongoing touch-based gesture.

在一些实施例中,相应事件识别器180包括具有可配置的属性、标志(flag)和/或列表的元数据183,其指示事件递送系统应当如何执行去往主动参与的事件识别器的子事件传递。在一些实施例中,元数据183包括可配置的属性、标志和/或列表,其指示事件识别器如何可以或者能够彼此交互。在一些实施例中,元数据183包括可配置的属性、标志和/或列表,其指示子事件是否被递送到视图或程序层次结构中的不同层级。In some embodiments, corresponding event recognizers 180 include metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively participating event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers may or can interact with each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to different levels in the view or program hierarchy.

在一些实施例中,相应事件识别器180在事件的一个或多个特定子事件被识别时激活与事件相关联的事件处理机190。在一些实施例中,相应事件识别器180向事件处理机190递送与事件相关联的事件信息。激活事件处理机190不同于向相应的命中视图发送(或延迟发送)子事件。在一些实施例中,事件识别器180抛出与识别事件相关联的标志,并且与该标志相关联的事件处理机190抓住该标志并执行预定义过程。In some embodiments, a corresponding event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the event when one or more specific sub-events of the event are recognized. In some embodiments, a corresponding event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating event handler 190 is distinct from sending (or delaying sending) the sub-events to the corresponding hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

在一些实施例中,事件递送指令188包括子事件递送指令,其递送关于子事件的事件信息而不激活事件处理机。相反,子事件递送指令向与一系列子事件或主动参与的视图相关联的事件处理机递送事件信息。与一系列子事件或主动参与的视图相关联的事件处理机接收该事件信息并执行预定过程。In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver the event information to an event handler associated with a series of sub-events or an actively participating view. The event handler associated with the series of sub-events or the actively participating view receives the event information and executes a predetermined process.

在一些实施例中,数据更新器176创建并更新应用136-1中使用的数据。例如,数据更新器176更新联系人模块137中使用的电话号码,或者存储视频播放器模块145中使用的视频文件。在一些实施例中,对象更新器177创建并更新应用136-1中使用的数据。例如,对象更新器177创建新的用户界面对象或更新用户界面对象的位置。GUI更新器178更新GUI。例如,GUI更新器178准备显示器信息,并且将其发送至图形模块132用于在触敏显示器上显示。In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates phone numbers used in contact module 137 or stores video files used in video player module 145. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates new user interface objects or updates the positions of user interface objects. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.

在一些实施例中,(一个或多个)事件处理机190包括或能够访问数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178。在一些实施例中,数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178被包括在相应的应用136-1或应用视图191的单个模块中。在其他实施例中,数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178被包括在两个或更多软件模块中。In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 include or have access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of the corresponding application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in two or more software modules.

应当理解,前面关于触敏显示器上的用户触摸的事件处理的论述也适用于操作具有输入设备的多功能设备100的其他形式的用户输入,其中不是所有用户输入都是在触摸屏上发起的,例如,与单个或多个键盘按压或保持可选地相配合的鼠标移动和鼠标按钮按压;触控板上的接触运动(诸如叩击、拖拽、滚动等);触笔输入,设备的移动;语音指令;检测到的眼睛运动,生物计量输入;和/或上述各项的任何组合,都可选地用作与定义要被识别的事件的子事件相对应的输入。It should be understood that the foregoing discussion of event handling for user touches on a touch-sensitive display also applies to other forms of user input for operating a multifunction device 100 having an input device, where not all user input is initiated on the touch screen, for example, mouse movements and mouse button presses, optionally in conjunction with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact motions on a touchpad (such as taps, drags, scrolling, etc.); stylus input, movement of the device; voice commands; detected eye movements, biometric input; and/or any combination of the foregoing, optionally used as input corresponding to sub-events defining the event to be recognized.

图2图示了根据一些实施例的具有触摸屏112的便携式多功能设备100。触摸屏在用户界面(UI)200内可选地显示一个或多个图形。在该实施例以及如下所述的其他实施例中,用户能够通过对图形做出手势(例如用一个或多个手指202(在图中未按比例绘制)或一个或多个触笔(在图中未按比例绘制))来选择一个或多个图形。在一些实施例中,对一个或多个图形的选择发生在用户中断与一个或多个图形接触时。在一些实施例中,手势可选地包括一个或多个叩击、一个或多个轻扫(从左到右、从右到左、向上和/或向下)和/或已经与设备100接触的手指的转动(从右到左、从左到右、向上和/或向下)。在一些实现方式或者情况中,与图形的无意接触不会选择图形。例如,当与选择对应的手势是叩击时,扫过应用图标的轻扫手势可选地不会选择对应的应用。FIG2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch screen 112 according to some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within a user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well as other embodiments described below, a user can select one or more graphics by gesturing with the graphics (e.g., with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses (not drawn to scale in the figure)). In some embodiments, selection of the one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, from right to left, up and/or down), and/or rotation of a finger already in contact with the device 100 (from right to left, from left to right, up and/or down). In some implementations or circumstances, unintentional contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture across an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

设备100还可以包括一个或多个物理按钮,诸如“主画面”或菜单按钮204。如前所述,菜单按钮204可以用于导航至可以在设备100上执行的应用集合中的任何应用136。备选地,在一些实施例中,菜单按钮被实施为触摸屏112上显示的GUI中的软按键。The device 100 may also include one or more physical buttons, such as a “home” or menu button 204. As previously described, the menu button 204 may be used to navigate to any application 136 in a collection of applications that may be executed on the device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch screen 112.

在一些实施例中,设备100包括触摸屏112、菜单按钮204、用于打开/关闭设备电源和锁定设备的下压按钮206、以及(一个或多个)音量调节按钮208、订户标识模块(SIM)卡槽210、耳机插孔212和对接/充电外部端口124。下压按钮206可选地用于通过压下该按钮并使该按钮保持在压下状态预定义的时间间隔来打开/关闭设备电源;通过压下该按钮并在经过预定义的时间间隔之前释放该按钮来锁定设备;和/或解锁设备或发起解锁过程。在一个备选实施例中,设备100还通过麦克风113接受用于激活或去激活某些功能的语音输入。设备100可选地还包括用于在触摸屏112上检测接触强度的一个或者多个接触强度传感器165和/或用于生成对设备100的用户的触觉输出的一个或者多个触觉输出生成器167。In some embodiments, device 100 includes a touch screen 112, a menu button 204, a push button 206 for turning the device on/off and locking the device, as well as volume adjustment buttons 208, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210, a headphone jack 212, and a docking/charging external port 124. Push button 206 is optionally used to turn the device on/off by pressing and holding the button for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by pressing and releasing the button before a predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlocking process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also accepts voice input for activating or deactivating certain functions via microphone 113. Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact force sensors 165 for detecting contact force on touch screen 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output for a user of device 100.

图3是根据一些实施例具有显示器和触敏表面的示例性多功能设备的框图。设备300不必是便携式的。在一些实施例中,设备300是膝上型计算机、台式计算机、平板计算机、多媒体播放器设备、导航设备、教育设备(诸如儿童学习玩具)、游戏系统或控制设备(例如,家用或工业控制器)。设备300通常包括一个或多个处理单元(CPU)310、一个或多个网络或其他通信接口360、存储器370、以及用于互连这些部件的一个或多个通信总线320。通信总线320可选地包括互连和控制系统部件之间通信的电路装置(有时被称作芯片组)。设备300包括含有显示器340(其通常为触摸屏显示器)的输入/输出(I/O)接口330。输入/输出接口330也可选地包括键盘和/或鼠标(或其他定点设备)350和触摸板355、用于在设备300上生成触觉输出的触觉输出生成器357(例如,类似于以上参考附图1A所描述的(一个或多个)触觉输出生成器167)、传感器359(例如,类似于以上参考附图1A所描述的(一个或多个)接触强度传感器165的光学、加速度、接近、触敏和/或接触强度传感器)。存储器370包括高速随机存取存储器,诸如DRAM、SRAM、DDR RAM或其他随机存取固态存储设备;并且可选地包括非易失性存储器,诸如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、光盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器370可以可选地包括远离(一个或多个)CPU 310的一个或多个存储设备。在一些实施例中,存储器370存储与在便携式多功能设备100(图1)的存储器102中存储的程序、模块、和数据结构类似的程序、模块、和数据结构或其子集。此外,存储器370可选地存储未存在于便携式多功能设备100的存储器102中的附加程序、模块、和数据结构。例如,设备300的存储器370可选地存储绘图模块380、演示模块382、文字处理模块384、网站创建模块386、盘编写模块388和/或电子表格模块390,而便携式多功能设备100(图1A)的存储器102可选地不存储这些模块。Fig. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunctional device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface according to some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a children's learning toy), a game system or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more networks or other communication interfaces 360, a memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication bus 320 optionally includes a circuit device (sometimes referred to as a chipset) for interconnecting and controlling communication between system components. Device 300 includes an input/output (I/O) interface 330 containing a display 340 (which is typically a touch screen display). Input/output interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, a tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile output on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ), and sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid-state storage devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. Memory 370 may optionally include one or more storage devices remote from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures similar to, or a subset of, those stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1 ). Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores a drawing module 380, a presentation module 382, a word processing module 384, a website creation module 386, a disk authoring module 388, and/or a spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules.

图3中的上述元件的每个元件可以存储在一个或多个前述存储器设备中。上述模块中的每个模块对应于用于执行如上所述功能的指令集。上述模块或程序(例如,指令集)不需要实施为单独软件程序、过程或模块,因此这些模块的各种子集可以在各实施例中组合或以其他方式被重新布置。在一些实施例中,存储器370可以存储上述模块和数据结构的子集。此外,存储器370可以存储上文未描述的附加模块和数据结构。Each element of the above-mentioned elements in Fig. 3 can be stored in one or more aforementioned memory devices.Each module in the above-mentioned modules corresponds to the instruction set for performing the functions described above.Above-mentioned modules or programs (e.g., instruction sets) do not need to be implemented as separate software programs, processes or modules, so the various subsets of these modules can be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments.In certain embodiments, memory 370 can store a subset of the above-mentioned modules and data structures.In addition, memory 370 can store additional modules and data structures not described above.

现在把注意力转向可以在例如便携式多功能设备100上实施的用户界面的实施例。Attention is now directed to embodiments of user interfaces that may be implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100 .

图4A图示了根据一些实施例用于便携式多功能设备100上的应用菜单的示例性用户界面。类似用户界面可以在设备300上实施。在一些实施例中,用户界面400包括以下元件或其子集或超集:Figure 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for an application menu on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. A similar user interface may be implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

·信号强度指示符402,用于(多种)无线通信,诸如蜂窝信号和Wi-Fi信号;Signal strength indicators 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

·时间404;Time 404;

·蓝牙指示符405;Bluetooth indicator 405;

·电池状态指示符406;Battery status indicator 406;

·托盘408,具有以下频繁使用的应用的图标,诸如:Tray 408, with icons for frequently used applications such as:

o用于电话模块138的图标416,标记为“电话”,其可选地包括未接呼叫或语音邮件消息的数目的指示符414;o An icon 416 for the phone module 138, labeled "Phone," which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;

o用于电子邮件客户端模块140的图标418,标记为“邮件”,其可选地包括未读电子邮件的数目的指示符410;o An icon 418 for the email client module 140 , labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails;

o用于浏览器模块147的图标420,标记为“浏览器”;以及o Icon 420 for the browser module 147, labeled "Browser"; and

o用于视频和音乐播放器模块152的图标422,也被称为iPod(Apple公司的商标)模块152,标记为“iPod”;以及o Icon 422 for the video and music player module 152, also referred to as the iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152, labeled “iPod”; and

·用于其他应用的图标,诸如:Icons for other applications, such as:

o用于IM模块141的图标424,标记为“消息”;o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled "Messages";

o用于日历模块148的图标426,标记为“日历”;o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled "Calendar";

o用于图像管理模块144的图标42,标记为“照片”;o Icon 42 for image management module 144, labeled "Photos";

o用于相机模块143的图标430,标记为“相机”;o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled "Camera";

o用于在线视频模块155的图标432,标记为“在线视频”;o Icon 432 for the online video module 155, labeled "Online Video";

o用于股票微件149-2的图标434,标记为“股票”;o Icon 434 for the stock widget 149 - 2 , labeled “Stocks”;

o用于地图模块154的图标436,标记为“地图”;o Icon 436 for the map module 154, labeled "Map";

o用于天气微件149-1的图标438,标记为“天气”;o Icon 438 for the weather widget 149 - 1 , labeled “Weather”;

o用于闹钟微件149-4的图标440,标记为“时钟”;o Icon 440 for the alarm clock widget 149 - 4 , labeled “Clock”;

o用于锻炼支持模块142的图标442,标记为“锻炼支持”;o Icon 442 for the exercise support module 142, labeled "Exercise Support";

o用于备忘录模块153的图标444,标记为“备忘录”;o Icon 444 for the memo module 153, labeled "Memo";

o用于设置应用或者模块的图标446,标记为“设置”,其提供对设备100及其各个应用136的设置的访问。o An icon 446 for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for the device 100 and its various applications 136 .

应当理解图4A中所图示的图标标签仅为示例性的。例如,用于视频和音乐播放器模块152的图标422可以可选地被标记为“音乐”或“音乐播放器”。其他标签可选地用于各个应用图标。在一些实施例中,用于相应应用图标的标签包括对应于相应应用图标的应用的名称。在一些实施例中,特定应用图标的标签与对应于特定应用图标的应用的名称不同。It should be understood that the icon labels illustrated in FIG4A are exemplary only. For example, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 may alternatively be labeled "Music" or "Music Player." Other labels may alternatively be used for individual application icons. In some embodiments, the label for a respective application icon includes the name of the application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, the label for a particular application icon is different from the name of the application corresponding to the particular application icon.

图4B图示了具有与显示器450(例如,触摸屏显示器112)分离的触敏表面451(例如,图3的平板或触摸板355)的设备(例如,图3的设备300)上的示例性用户界面。设备300还可选地包括用于在触敏表面451上检测接触强度的一个或者多个接触强度传感器(例如,传感器357中的一个或者多个传感器)和/或用于生成对设备300的用户的触觉输出的一个或者多个触觉输出生成器359。4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300 of FIG. 3 ) having a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., tablet or touchpad 355 of FIG. 3 ) that is separate from a display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112 ). Device 300 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more sensors of sensors 357 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs to a user of device 300.

虽然以下一些示例将针对在触摸屏显示器112上的输入给出(其中触敏表面与显示器组合在一起),但是如图4B所示在一些实施例中,设备检测与显示器分离的触敏表面上的输入。在一些实施例中,触敏表面(例如,图4B中的451)具有对应于显示器(例如,450)上主轴(例如,图4B中的453)的主轴(例如,图4B中的452)。根据这些实施例,设备检测在对应于显示器上相应位置的位置处(例如,在图4B中,460对应于468并且462对应于470)的与触敏表面451的接触(例如,图4B中的460和462)。通过此方式,当触敏表面与多功能设备的显示器(例如,图4B中的450)分离时,设备在触敏表面(例如,图4B中的451)上检测到的用户输入(例如,接触460和接触462及其移动)由设备使用以操纵多功能设备的显示器上的用户界面。应当理解,类似方法可选地用于本文所述的其他用户界面。Although some of the following examples will be presented with respect to input on a touchscreen display 112 (where the touch-sensitive surface is combined with the display), in some embodiments, as shown in FIG4B , the device detects input on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG4B ) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG4B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG4B ) on the display (e.g., 450). According to these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations corresponding to corresponding locations on the display (e.g., 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 in FIG4B ). In this manner, when the touch-sensitive surface is separated from the display (e.g., 450 in FIG4B ) of the multifunction device, user input (e.g., contacts 460 and 462 and their movement) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG4B ) is used by the device to manipulate a user interface on the display of the multifunction device. It should be understood that similar methods may optionally be used for other user interfaces described herein.

此外,虽然以下示例主要参照手指输入(例如,手指接触、手指叩击手势、手指轻扫手势)给出,但是应当理解的是在一些实施例中,一个或多个手指输入可以被来自另一输入设备(例如,基于鼠标的输入或触笔输入)的输入替换。例如,轻扫手势可选地被鼠标点击(例如,而不是接触)随后沿轻扫路径移动光标(例如,而不是移动接触)替换。作为另一示例,叩击手势可选地当光标位于叩击手势的位置上(例如,而不是检测接触随后停止检测该接触)时被鼠标点击替换。类似地,当同时检测到多个用户输入时,应当理解多个计算机鼠标可选地被同时使用,或者鼠标和手指接触可选地被同时使用。In addition, although the following examples are primarily given with reference to finger input (e.g., finger contact, finger tap gesture, finger swipe gesture), it should be understood that in some embodiments, one or more finger inputs can be replaced by input from another input device (e.g., mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click (e.g., instead of contact) followed by moving the cursor along the swipe path (e.g., instead of moving the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click when the cursor is at the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detecting contact and then ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are optionally used simultaneously, or that mice and finger contacts are optionally used simultaneously.

图5A图示了示例性个人电子设备500。设备500包括主体502。在一些实施例中,设备500可以包括关于设备100和300(例如,图1A-4B)描述的特征中的一些或全部特征。在一些实施例中,设备500具有触敏显示屏504,此后称为触摸屏504。备选地,或者除了触摸屏504之外,设备500具有显示器和触敏表面。如同设备100和300,在一些实施例中,触摸屏504(或触敏表面)可以具有用于检测正在应用的接触(例如,触摸)的强度的一个或多个强度传感器。该触摸屏504(或触敏表面)的一个或多个强度传感器可以提供表示触摸的强度的输出数据。设备500的用户界面可以基于触摸的强度来对触摸进行响应,意味着不同强度的触摸可以调用设备500上的不同的用户界面操作。Figure 5A illustrates an exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500 includes a body 502. In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., Figures 1A-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has a touch-sensitive display screen 504, hereinafter referred to as a touch screen 504. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in some embodiments, touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) may have one or more intensity sensors for detecting the intensity of contact (e.g., touch) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of the touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) may provide output data representing the intensity of the touch. The user interface of device 500 may respond to the touch based on the intensity of the touch, meaning that touches of different intensities may invoke different user interface operations on device 500.

例如,用于检测和处理触摸强度的技术可以在以下相关申请中找到:2013年5月8日提交、题为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Displaying UserInterface Objects Corresponding to an Application”的国际专利申请序列号PCT/US2013/040061以及2013年11月11日提交的、题为“Device,Method,and Graphical UserInterface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display OutputRelationships”的国际专利申请序列号PCT/US2013/069483,这些申请中的每个申请通过引用以其整体被并入于此。For example, technology for detecting and processing touch intensity can be found in the following related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, filed on May 8, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying UserInterface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, filed on November 11, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical UserInterface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display OutputRelationships,” each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

在一些实施例中,设备500具有一个或多个输入机构506和508。输入机构506和508(如果被包括)可以是物理的。物理输入机构的示例包括推动按钮和旋转机构。在一些实施例中,设备500具有一个或多个附接机构。这样的附接机构(如果被包括)可以允许设备500与例如,帽子、眼镜、耳饰、项链、衬衫、夹克、手链、表带、链条、裤子、皮带、鞋子、手提包、背包等附接。这些附接机构可以允许设备500被用户穿戴。In some embodiments, the device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508 (if included) can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotational mechanisms. In some embodiments, the device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms (if included) can allow the device 500 to be attached to, for example, hats, glasses, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watchbands, chains, pants, belts, shoes, handbags, backpacks, etc. These attachment mechanisms can allow the device 500 to be worn by the user.

图5B描绘了示例性个人电子设备500。在一些实施例中,设备500可以包括关于图1A、图1B和图3描述的部件中的一些或全部部件。设备500具有总线512,其将I/O部分514与一个或多个计算机处理器516和存储器518操作地耦合。I/O部分514可以连接到显示器504,显示器504可以具有触敏部件522以及可选地触摸强度敏感524。此外,I/O部分514可以与通信单元530连接以用于使用Wi-Fi、蓝牙、近场通信(NFC)、蜂窝和/或其他无线通信技术接收应用和操作系统数据。设备500可以包括输入机构506和/或508。例如,输入机构506可以是可旋转的输入设备或者可按压和可旋转的输入设备。在一些示例中,输入机构508可以是按钮。FIG5B depicts an exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the components described with respect to FIG1A, FIG1B, and FIG3. Device 500 has a bus 512 that operatively couples an I/O portion 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and a memory 518. I/O portion 514 may be connected to a display 504, which may have a touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, touch intensity sensitivity 524. In addition, I/O portion 514 may be connected to a communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near-field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication technologies. Device 500 may include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508. For example, input mechanism 506 may be a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device. In some examples, input mechanism 508 may be a button.

在一些示例中,输入机构508可以是麦克风。个人电子设备500可以包括各种传感器,诸如GPS传感器532、加速度计534、方向传感器540(例如,指南针)、陀螺仪536、运动传感器538和/或它们的组合,所有这些设备可以操作地连接至I/O部分514。In some examples, input mechanism 508 can be a microphone. Personal electronic device 500 can include various sensors, such as a GPS sensor 532, an accelerometer 534, an orientation sensor 540 (e.g., a compass), a gyroscope 536, a motion sensor 538, and/or combinations thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O portion 514.

个人电子设备500的存储器518可以是非瞬态计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机可执行指令,该指令当由一个或多个计算机处理器516执行时,例如,可以使得计算机处理器执行以上描述的技术,包括过程1000-1200(图10A-10C、图11和图12)。计算机可执行指令还可以在任何非瞬态计算机可读介质内被存储和/或传输,以便由指令执行系统、装置或设备使用或者结合指令执行系统、装置或设备使用,该指令执行系统、装置或设备诸如基于计算机的系统、包含处理器的系统或者可以从指令执行系统、装置或设备中取指令并且执行该指令的其他系统。出于本文档的目的,“非瞬态计算机可读存储介质”可以是能够有形地包含或存储计算机可执行指令以便由指令执行系统、装置或设备使用或者结合指令执行系统、装置或设备使用的任何介质。非瞬态计算机可读存储介质可以包括但不限于,磁存储装置、光存储装置和/或半导体存储装置。这样的存储装置的示例包括磁盘、基于CD、DVD、或蓝光技术的光盘,以及永久固态存储器,诸如闪存、固态驱动器等。个人电子设备500不限于图5B的部件和配置,而是可以包括具有多种配置的其他或附加的部件。The memory 518 of the personal electronic device 500 can be a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium for storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by one or more computer processors 516, can, for example, cause the computer processor to perform the techniques described above, including processes 1000-1200 (Figures 10A-10C, Figures 11, and 12). Computer-executable instructions can also be stored and/or transmitted within any non-transitory computer-readable medium for use by or in conjunction with an instruction execution system, device, or apparatus, such as a computer-based system, a system containing a processor, or other system that can fetch instructions from and execute the instructions. For the purposes of this document, a "non-transitory computer-readable storage medium" can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in conjunction with an instruction execution system, device, or apparatus. Non-transitory computer-readable storage media can include, but are not limited to, magnetic storage devices, optical storage devices, and/or semiconductor storage devices. Examples of such storage devices include magnetic disks, optical disks based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technology, and persistent solid-state memory such as flash memory, solid-state drives, etc. Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B , but may include other or additional components in a variety of configurations.

如这里所使用的,术语“可供件”指代可以被显示在设备100、300和/或500(图1、图3和图5)的显示屏上的用户交互图形用户界面对象。例如,图像(例如,图标)、按钮以及文本(例如超链接)可以各自组成可供件。As used herein, the term "affordance" refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that can be displayed on a display screen of devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1, 3, and 5). For example, an image (e.g., an icon), a button, and text (e.g., a hyperlink) can each constitute an affordance.

如本文所使用的,术语“焦点选择器”指代指示用户正与其交互的用户界面的当前部分的输入元素。在包括光标或者其他位置标记的一些实现方式中,光标充当“焦点选择器”,使得当光标在特定用户界面元素(例如,按钮、窗口、滑块或者其他用户界面元素)之上的同时在触敏表面(例如,图3中的触摸板355或者图4B中的触敏表面451)上检测到输入(例如,按压输入)时,根据检测到的输入来调整特定用户界面。在包括实现与触摸屏显示器上的用户界面元素直接交互的触摸屏显示器(例如,图1A中的触敏显示器系统112或者图4A中的触摸屏112)的实现方式中,触摸屏上的检测到的接触充当“焦点选择器”,使得当在触摸屏显示器上在特定用户界面元素(例如,按钮、窗口、滑块或者其他用户界面元素)的位置处检测到输入(例如,通过接触的按压输入)时,根据检测到的输入来调整特定用户界面元素。在一些实现方式中,在触摸屏显示器上没有对应的光标的移动或者接触的移动的情况下(例如,通过使用跳格键或者箭头键以将焦点从一个按钮移动到另一按钮),将焦点从用户界面的一个区域移动到用户界面的另一个区域;在一些实现方式中,焦点选择器根据用户界面的不同区域之间的焦点的移动而移动。不考虑由焦点选择器采取的特定形式,焦点选择器通常是由用户控制的用户界面元素(或者触摸屏显示器上的接触),以便与用户界面通信用户的意在的交互(例如,通过向设备指示用户意在与其交互的用户界面的元素)。例如,在触敏表面(例如,触摸板或者触摸屏)上检测到按压输入时,在相应的按钮之上的焦点选择器(例如,光标、接触或者选择框)的位置将指示用户意在激活相应的按钮(而不是设备的显示器上示出的其它用户界面元素)。As used herein, the term "focus selector" refers to an input element that indicates the current portion of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other position marker, the cursor acts as a "focus selector" such that when input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface is adjusted based on the detected input. In implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4A ) that implements direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a "focus selector" such that when input (e.g., a press input by a contact) is detected at the location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element) on the touch screen display, the particular user interface element is adjusted based on the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one area of a user interface to another area of a user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another); in some implementations, a focus selector moves in accordance with the movement of focus between different areas of the user interface. Regardless of the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally a user interface element controlled by a user (or a contact on a touch screen display) to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating to the device the element of the user interface with which the user intended to interact). For example, when a press input is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen), the position of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, contact, or selection box) over a corresponding button will indicate that the user intended to activate the corresponding button (rather than other user interface elements shown on the device's display).

如在说明书和权利要求中所使用的,术语接触的“特性强度”指代基于一个或者多个接触强度的接触的特性。在一些实施例中,特性强度基于多个强度样本。特性强度可选地基于预定义数目的强度样本、或者在相对于预定义的事件(例如,在检测到接触之后、在检测到接触的抬起之前、在检测到接触的移动的开始之前或者之后、和/或在检测到接触的强度的减小之前或者之后)的预定时间段期间(例如,0.05秒、0.1秒、0.2秒、0.5秒、1秒、2秒、5秒、10秒)收集的强度样本的集合。接触的特性强度可选地基于以下各项中的一项或者多项:接触的强度的最大值、接触的强度的平均值、接触的强度的均值、接触的强度的最高10%数值、接触的强度的半高值、接触的强度的90%最大处的值等。在一些实施例中,接触的持续时间用于确定特性强度(例如,当特性强度是随时间变化的接触的强度的平均值)。在一些实施例中,将特性强度与一个或者多个强度阈值的集合进行比较,以确定是否已经由用户执行操作。例如,一个或者多个强度阈值的集合可以包括第一强度阈值和第二强度阈值。在该示例中,具有不超过第一阈值的特性强度的接触导致第一操作,具有超过第一阈值并且不超过第二阈值的特性强度的接触导致第二操作,并且具有超过第二阈值的特性强度的接触导致第三操作。在一些实施例中,特性强度与一个或者多个阈值之间比较用于确定是否执行一个或者多个操作(例如,是否执行相应的操作或者放弃执行相应的操作),而不被用于确定是执行第一操作还是执行第二操作。As used in the specification and claims, the term "characteristic intensity" of a contact refers to a characteristic of a contact based on one or more contact intensities. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on a plurality of intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is optionally based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05 seconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, before detecting the lift of the contact, before or after detecting the start of movement of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact). The characteristic intensity of the contact is optionally based on one or more of the following: a maximum value of the intensity of the contact, an average value of the intensity of the contact, a mean value of the intensity of the contact, the top 10% value of the intensity of the contact, the half-height value of the intensity of the contact, the value at 90% of the maximum value of the intensity of the contact, etc. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used to determine the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average value of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by the user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first threshold and does not exceed the second threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, the comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform the corresponding operation or abandon the corresponding operation), and is not used to determine whether to perform the first operation or the second operation.

在一些实施例中,为了确定特性强度的目的,标识手势中的一部分手势。例如,触敏表面可以接收从开始位置转变到达结束位置的连续的轻扫接触,在结束位置的点处接触的强度增加。在该示例中,在结束位置处的接触的特性强度可以仅基于连续的轻扫接触的一部分而不是基于整个轻扫接触(例如,仅结束位置处的轻扫接触的部分)。在一些实施例中,在确定接触的特性强度之前,可以将平滑算法应用于轻扫接触的强度。例如,平滑算法可选地包括以下各项中的一项或者多项:未加权的滑动平均平滑算法、三角平滑算法、中值滤波平滑算法、和/或指数平滑算法。在一些情况下,为了确定特性强度的目的,这些平滑算法消除了轻扫接触的强度的狭窄的峰值(spike)和谷值(dip)。In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for the purpose of determining characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact that transitions from a start position to an end position, with the intensity of the contact increasing at the point at the end position. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end position may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact rather than the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end position). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensity of the swipe contact before determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm may optionally include one or more of: an unweighted sliding average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some cases, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes and dips in the intensity of the swipe contact for the purpose of determining characteristic intensity.

触敏表面上接触的强度可以相对于一个或者多个强度阈值而被表征,诸如接触检测强度阈值、轻按压强度阈值、深按压强度阈值、和/或一个或者多个其他强度阈值。在一些实施例中,轻按压强度阈值对应于在其处设备将执行通常与点击物理鼠标或者触控板的按钮相关联的操作的强度。在一些实施例中,深按压强度阈值对应于在其处设备将执行不同于通常与点击物理鼠标或者触控板的按钮相关联的操作的强度。在一些实施例中,当检测到具有低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,并且高于正常接触检测强度阈值,其中低于正常接触检测强度阈值时,接触将不再被检测)的特性强度的接触时,设备将根据触敏表面上的接触的移动来移动焦点选择器,而不执行与轻按压强度阈值或者深按压强度阈值相关联的操作。总之,除非另外陈述,否则这些强度阈值在用户界面图的不同集合之间是一致的。The intensity of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface can be characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform an operation typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform an operation different from that typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected having a characteristic intensity that is below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a normal contact detection intensity threshold, where the contact will no longer be detected below the normal contact detection intensity threshold), the device will move the focus selector in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. In general, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent across different sets of user interface diagrams.

从低于轻按压强度阈值的强度到在轻按压强度阈值与深按压强度阈值之间的强度的接触的特性强度的增加有时被称为“轻按压”输入。从低于深按压强度阈值的强度到高于深按压强度阈值的强度的接触的特性强度的增加有时被称为“深按压”输入。从低于接触检测强度阈值的强度到在接触检测强度阈值与轻按压强度阈值之间的强度的接触的特性强度的增加有时被称为检测触摸表面上的接触。从高于接触检测强度阈值的强度到低于接触检测强度阈值的强度的接触的特性强度的减少有时被称为检测从触摸表面的接触的抬起。在一些实施例中,接触检测强度阈值为零。在一些实施例中,接触检测强度阈值大于零。An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "light press" input. An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "deep press" input. An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the contact detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting a contact on the touch surface. A decrease in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity above the contact detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting lift of the contact from the touch surface. In some embodiments, the contact detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.

在本文所描述的一些实施例中,响应于检测到包括相应的按压输入的手势或者响应于检测到利用相应的接触(或者多个接触)执行的相应的按压输入,执行一个或者多个操作,其中至少部分地基于检测到接触(或者多个接触)的强度增加至高于按压输入强度阈值,检测相应的按压输入。在一些实施例中,响应于检测到相应的接触的强度增加至高于按压输入强度阈值(例如,相应的按压输入的“向下笔画(stroke)”),执行相应的操作。在一些实施例中,按压输入包括相应的接触的强度增加至高于按压输入强度阈值和接触的强度随后减少至低于按压输入强度阈值,并且响应于检测到相应的接触的强度随后减少至低于按压输入阈值(例如,相应的按压输入的“向上笔画”),执行相应的操作。In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a corresponding press input, or in response to detecting a corresponding press input performed with a corresponding contact (or contacts), wherein the corresponding press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or contacts) above a press input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the corresponding operation is performed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of the corresponding contact above the press input intensity threshold (e.g., a "downward stroke" of the corresponding press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the corresponding contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, and in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in intensity of the corresponding contact below the press input intensity threshold (e.g., an "upward stroke" of the corresponding press input), the corresponding operation is performed.

在一些实施例中,设备采用强度迟滞以避免有时被称为“抖动”的意外输入,其中设备定义或者选择与按压输入强度阈值具有预定义的关系的迟滞强度阈值(例如,迟滞强度阈值低于按压输入强度阈值的X个强度单位,或者迟滞强度阈值是按压输入强度阈值的75%、90%、或者一些合理比例)。因此,在一些实施例中,按压输入包括相应的接触的强度增加至高于按压输入强度阈值和接触的强度随后减少至低于对应于按压输入强度阈值的迟滞强度阈值,并且响应于检测到相应的接触的强度的随后减少至低于迟滞强度阈值(例如,相应的按压输入的“向上笔画”),执行相应的操作。类似地,在一些实施例中,仅当设备检测到接触的强度从处于或者低于迟滞强度阈值增加到处于或者高于按压输入强度阈值,并且可选地接触的强度随后减少到处于或者低于迟滞强度时,检测按压输入,并且响应于检测到按压输入(例如,接触的强度的增加或者接触的强度的减少,这取决于环境),执行相应的操作。为了便于解释,响应于与按压输入强度阈值相关联的按压或者响应于包括按压输入的手势执行的操作的描述可选地响应于检测到以下任何一项而被触发:接触的强度增加至高于按压输入强度阈值、接触的强度从低于迟滞强度阈值的强度增加到高于按压输入强度阈值的强度、接触的强度减少至低于按压输入强度阈值、和/或接触的强度减少至低于对应于按压输入强度阈值的迟滞强度阈值。此外,在操作被描述为响应于检测到接触的强度减少至低于按压输入强度阈值而被执行的示例中,操作可选地响应于检测到接触的强度减少至低于对应于并且低于按压输入强度阈值的迟滞强度阈值而被执行。In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid unexpected inputs, sometimes referred to as "jitter," where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold that has a predefined relationship to a press input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units below the press input intensity threshold, or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, a press input includes an increase in intensity of the corresponding contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press input intensity threshold, and in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the corresponding contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an "upward stroke" of the corresponding press input), a corresponding operation is performed. Similarly, in some embodiments, a press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to at or above the press input intensity threshold, and optionally a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to at or below the hysteresis intensity, and in response to detecting the press input (e.g., an increase in intensity of the contact or a decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances), a corresponding operation is performed. For ease of explanation, descriptions of operations performed in response to a press associated with a press input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture that includes a press input are optionally triggered in response to detecting any of: the intensity of the contact increasing above the press input intensity threshold, the intensity of the contact increasing from an intensity below a hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press input intensity threshold, the intensity of the contact decreasing below the press input intensity threshold, and/or the intensity of the contact decreasing below a hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press input intensity threshold. Furthermore, in examples where operations are described as being performed in response to detecting the intensity of the contact decreasing below the press input intensity threshold, the operations are optionally performed in response to detecting the intensity of the contact decreasing below a hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to and is below the press input intensity threshold.

如本文所使用的,“安装的应用”指代已经被下载到电子设备(例如,设备100、300和/或500)上并且已经准备好在设备上被启动(例如,变成打开)的软件。在一些实施例中,通过从下载包提取程序部分并且将提取的部分与计算机系统的操作系统整合的安装程序的方式,下载的应用变成安装的应用。As used herein, an "installed application" refers to software that has been downloaded to an electronic device (e.g., device 100, 300, and/or 500) and is ready to be launched (e.g., become open) on the device. In some embodiments, a downloaded application becomes an installed application by way of an installer that extracts program portions from a download package and integrates the extracted portions with the operating system of the computer system.

如本文所使用的,术语“开放应用”或“执行的应用”指代具有保留状态信息(例如,作为设备/全局内部状态157/应用内部状态192的一部分)的软件应用。打开的或者执行的应用可以是以下类型的应用中的任何一种:As used herein, the term "open application" or "executing application" refers to a software application that has retained state information (e.g., as part of device/global internal state 157/application internal state 192). An open or executing application can be any of the following types of applications:

·活跃应用,其当前被显示在应用正在其上被使用的设备的显示屏上;Active applications, which are currently displayed on the display of the device on which the application is being used;

·后台应用(或后台进程),其当前没有被显示,但是用于该应用的一个或者多个进程正由一个或者多个处理器处理;以及Background applications (or background processes), which are not currently displayed, but for which one or more processes are being processed by one or more processors; and

·挂起或者休眠的应用,其没有在运行,但是具有被存储在存储器(分别地,易失性和非易失性)中并且可以用于恢复应用的执行的状态信息。• A suspended or dormant application that is not running, but has state information stored in memory (volatile and non-volatile, respectively) that can be used to resume execution of the application.

如本文所使用的,术语“关闭的应用”指代不具有保留状态信息(例如,用于关闭的应用的状态信息没有被存储在设备的存储器中)的软件应用。因此,关闭应用包括停止和/或去除用于应用的应用进程并且从设备的存储器中去除应用应用的状态信息。通常,在第一应用中打开第二应用不会关闭第一应用。当第二应用被显示并且第一应用停止被显示时,第一应用变成后台应用。如本文所使用的,“启动”应用指代打开关闭的应用,以使得其变成活跃的开放应用。As used herein, the term "closed application" refers to a software application that does not retain state information (e.g., the state information for a closed application is not stored in the device's memory). Thus, closing an application includes stopping and/or removing the application process for the application and removing the application's state information from the device's memory. Typically, opening a second application within a first application does not close the first application. When the second application is displayed and the first application ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes a background application. As used herein, "launching" an application refers to opening a closed application so that it becomes an active, open application.

注意力现在转向可以在具有显示器和触敏表面的多功能设备(诸如,设备100、300和/或500(图1、图3和图5))上被实施以提供电子触摸通信功能的用户界面(“UI”)和相关联的过程。下面所描述的技术中的一个或者多个技术可以被称为“电子触摸”通信。Attention now turns to a user interface ("UI") and associated processes that may be implemented on a multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, such as devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1, 3, and 5), to provide electronic touch communication functionality. One or more of the techniques described below may be referred to as "electronic touch" communication.

1、示例性电子触摸通信1. Exemplary Electronic Touch Communication

图6A-6D描绘了在计算设备600与699的用户之间的示例性电子触摸通信。在一些实施例中,设备600和699中的每个设备是设备100、300或者500(图1、图3和图5)。为了清楚说明,图6A-6C中的图示的顶部对应于显示在设备600上的用户界面,图示的底部对应于显示在设备699上的用户界面。6A-6D depict exemplary electronic touch communications between users of computing devices 600 and 699. In some embodiments, each of devices 600 and 699 is device 100, 300, or 500 (FIGS. 1, 3, and 5). For clarity, the top portion of the illustrations in FIG6A-6C corresponds to a user interface displayed on device 600, and the bottom portion of the illustrations corresponds to a user interface displayed on device 699.

如所示出的,设备600显示具有用于启动设备上的各个模块的多个图标的用户界面602,包括图标604。图标604可以对应于闹钟应用,例如,这意味着当选择(例如,触摸)图标时,设备600启动对应的闹钟应用。设备600还具有输入机构606。在一些实施例中,输入机构606是按压按钮。As shown, device 600 displays a user interface 602 having multiple icons for launching various modules on the device, including icon 604. Icon 604 can correspond to an alarm clock application, for example, which means that when the icon is selected (e.g., touched), device 600 launches the corresponding alarm clock application. Device 600 also has input mechanism 606. In some embodiments, input mechanism 606 is a push button.

当设备600检测按钮606的激活(例如,按压)时,设备600显示电话簿联系人用户界面(UI)610。例如,电话簿联系人UI 610可以具有表示用户的朋友和家人的可供件。电话簿联系人UI 610中表示的联系人从对设备600可访问的应用数据被获得,诸如与电话或者日历应用相关联的数据。这样的数据可以被本地存储在设备上、被远程存储在同伴的蜂窝电话上、和/或被远程存储在“云”上。When device 600 detects activation (e.g., pressing) of button 606, device 600 displays phonebook contacts user interface (UI) 610. For example, phonebook contacts UI 610 may have affordances representing the user's friends and family. The contacts represented in phonebook contacts UI 610 are obtained from application data accessible to device 600, such as data associated with a phone or calendar application. Such data may be stored locally on the device, remotely on a companion's cell phone, and/or remotely in the "cloud."

电话簿联系人UI 610可以被滚动和/或被缩放以揭示表示电话簿联系人的附加的可供件。例如,轻扫输入可以用于滚动电话簿联系人UI 610,并且收缩/去收缩输入可以用于缩放电话簿联系人UI 610。在一些实施例中,设备600具有可旋转输入机构,并且可旋转输入机构的移动使得电话簿联系人UI 610缩放(或者滚动)。在一些实施例中,在电话簿联系人UI 610上表示的联系人是对设备600可访问的电话簿联系人的全集中的子集。显示的子集可以表示之前已经由用户指定的联系人,例如,作为用户的“收藏”,或者用户或系统定义的“白名单”或者“灰名单”。Phonebook contacts UI 610 can be scrolled and/or zoomed to reveal additional affordances representing phonebook contacts. For example, a swipe input can be used to scroll phonebook contacts UI 610, and a pinch/unpinch input can be used to zoom phonebook contacts UI 610. In some embodiments, device 600 has a rotatable input mechanism, and movement of the rotatable input mechanism causes phonebook contacts UI 610 to zoom (or scroll). In some embodiments, the contacts represented on phonebook contacts UI 610 are a subset of the full set of phonebook contacts accessible to device 600. The displayed subset can represent contacts that have been previously designated by the user, for example, as the user's "favorites," or a user- or system-defined "whitelist" or "greylist."

响应于对可供件611的选择,设备600显示联系人信息用户界面616,其提供关于所选的电话簿联系人的附加信息。在图示的示例中,显示了电话簿联系人的姓名617和图像620。在备选的实施例中,当联系人的图像不可用时,可以使用联系人的姓名生成首字母来提供系统生成的字母组合(monogram)。此外,联系人信息UI 616具有用于发起呼叫(音频和/或视频)的可供件618和用于发起针对电话簿联系人617的消息(例如,经由诸如SMS和MMS等的服务的短消息、经由诸如由加尼福尼亚州库比蒂诺的Apple公司提供的等的服务的文本消息)的可供件619。In response to selection of affordance 611, device 600 displays a contact information user interface 616 that provides additional information about the selected phonebook contact. In the illustrated example, the phonebook contact's name 617 and image 620 are displayed. In an alternative embodiment, when an image of the contact is not available, a system-generated monogram can be provided using the contact's name initials. In addition, contact information UI 616 has affordance 618 for initiating a call (audio and/or video) and affordance 619 for initiating a message to phonebook contact 617 (e.g., a short message via services such as SMS and MMS, a text message via services such as those provided by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California).

响应于在显示联系人信息UI 616的同时检测到的用户输入,设备600转变到绘图区域630的显示(也被称为画布)。绘图区域630提供用于基于触摸的绘图的区域。在一些实施例中,用于调用绘图区域630的用户输入是电话簿联系人姓名617或者联系人图像620上的触摸。在一些实施例中,需要调用绘图区域630的用户输入是远离可供件618和619的联系人信息UI 616上的触摸。In response to user input detected while displaying contact information UI 616, device 600 transitions to displaying drawing area 630 (also referred to as a canvas). Drawing area 630 provides an area for touch-based drawing. In some embodiments, the user input for invoking drawing area 630 is a touch on phonebook contact name 617 or contact image 620. In some embodiments, the user input required to invoke drawing area 630 is a touch on contact information UI 616 away from affordances 618 and 619.

转到图6B,设备600检测绘图区域630中的用户输入632。用户输入632包括类似笑脸的轻扫移动。设备600显示对应于用户输入632的可视表示634。可视表示634在已经被显示一定时间量之后逐渐消失,如由虚线636所指示的。6B , device 600 detects user input 632 in drawing area 630. User input 632 includes a swipe motion resembling a smiley face. Device 600 displays a visual representation 634 corresponding to user input 632. Visual representation 634 gradually fades after being displayed for a certain amount of time, as indicated by dashed line 636.

设备600向设备699发送表示输入632的数据。在一些实施例中,在自输入632以来预定的时间量已经过去之后,设备600发送数据。当输入632包括多个轻扫时,设备600可以等待直到在最后的轻扫之后、在发送数据之前预定时间量已经过去。在一些实施例中,数据的发送与可视表示634的淡出相协调。通过这种方式,可视表示634的淡出还有助于通知用户触摸通信已经被发送到设备699。Device 600 sends data representing input 632 to device 699. In some embodiments, device 600 sends the data after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since input 632. When input 632 includes multiple swipes, device 600 may wait until a predetermined amount of time has elapsed after the last swipe before sending the data. In some embodiments, the sending of the data is coordinated with the fading of visual representation 634. In this way, the fading of visual representation 634 also helps to notify the user that a touch communication has been sent to device 699.

在与电话簿联系人617相关联的外部设备699处,接收到传入的数据,并且提供向用户通知传入的通信的输出。在一些实施例中,设备699显示用于指示传入的通信的提醒638。在一些实施例中,设备699初始产生可听和/或触觉输出,并且在检测到设备的移动时(例如,诸如用户抬起或者拾起设备),提醒638变成显示的。在一些实施例中,在显示提醒638时,设备699产生可听和/或触觉输出。由于可穿戴电子设备699与其用户之间极为贴近—可能用户将感觉到触觉振动,因此,在这种情况下,触觉输出的使用特别有效。At an external device 699 associated with the phonebook contact 617, incoming data is received and an output is provided to notify the user of the incoming communication. In some embodiments, the device 699 displays an alert 638 indicating the incoming communication. In some embodiments, the device 699 initially generates an audible and/or tactile output, and upon detecting movement of the device (e.g., such as the user lifting or picking up the device), the alert 638 becomes displayed. In some embodiments, the device 699 generates an audible and/or tactile output while displaying the alert 638. The use of tactile output is particularly effective in this context due to the close proximity between the wearable electronic device 699 and its user—it is likely that the user will feel the tactile vibration.

在查看提醒638时,用户可以接受或者拒绝查看传入通信。在一些实施例中,提醒638上的叩击输入,或者与看着提醒638超过阈值持续时间的持续时间的用户相关联的输入(例如,加速度计输入或者照相机输入)指示接受。在接受时,设备699显示接收到的通信的可视表示。在一些实施例中,在接受查看通信时,设备699启动对应的电子触摸通信应用,并且显示用于示出传入绘图的绘图区域。在一些实施例中,在接受查看通信时,在不附加地启动电子触摸通信应用的情况下,设备699显示通信。在一些实施例中,提醒638上的轻扫(例如,向上或者向下)指示不予理会,并且作为响应,设备699不示出传入的通信。While viewing the reminder 638, the user can accept or decline to view the incoming communication. In some embodiments, a tap input on the reminder 638, or an input associated with the user looking at the reminder 638 for a duration exceeding a threshold duration (e.g., an accelerometer input or a camera input), indicates acceptance. Upon acceptance, the device 699 displays a visual representation of the received communication. In some embodiments, upon accepting to view the communication, the device 699 launches the corresponding electronic touch communication application and displays a drawing area for showing the incoming drawing. In some embodiments, upon accepting to view the communication, the device 699 displays the communication without additionally launching the electronic touch communication application. In some embodiments, a swipe (e.g., up or down) on the reminder 638 indicates to dismiss, and in response, the device 699 does not display the incoming communication.

用于确定设备(诸如设备699)何时被抬起或者被拾起到查看位置的技术在2014年7月18日提交的、题为“Raise Gesture Detection in a Device”的共同未决的美国临时专利申请序列号第62/026,532号中被描述。用于确定用户是否已经看着提醒超过阈值的持续时间的技术在2014年9月2日提交的、将Lawrence Yang等命名为发明人的、题为“REDUCED-SIZE INTERFACES FOR MANAGING ALERTS”的共同未决的美国临时专利申请中被描述。这些申请的内容通过引用将其整体并入于此。Techniques for determining when a device, such as device 699, is raised or picked up to a viewing position are described in co-pending U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/026,532, entitled “Raise Gesture Detection in a Device,” filed on July 18, 2014. Techniques for determining whether a user has looked at an alert for a duration exceeding a threshold are described in co-pending U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/026,532, entitled “REDUCED-SIZE INTERFACES FOR MANAGING ALERTS,” filed on September 2, 2014, naming Lawrence Yang et al. as inventors. The contents of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

在图示的示例中,设备699检测用于查看通信的用户接受,并且作为响应,启动电子触摸通信应用以显示绘图区域640。绘图区域640具有触摸输入632的可视表示642。转到图6C,可视表示642在被显示某些阈值持续时间之后逐渐消失,如由虚线644所描绘的。In the illustrated example, device 699 detects user acceptance to view the communication and, in response, launches the electronic touch communication application to display a drawing area 640. Drawing area 640 has a visual representation 642 of touch input 632. Turning to FIG6C , visual representation 642 fades away after being displayed for some threshold duration, as depicted by dashed line 644.

当显示绘图区域640时,设备699可以检测具有类似笑脸的轻扫的用户输入650。作为响应,设备699显示检测到的输入650的可视表示654。转到图6D,在一段时间之后,设备699向设备600发送向设备600通知检测到的输入650的数据。设备699也淡出可视表示654(如由虚线656所指示的)。由于设备600已经显示绘图区域630,因此在从设备699接收到表示输入650的数据时,设备650显示输入650的可视表示660(例如,笑脸)。通过这种方式,设备600和699的用户可以使用基于触摸的电子通信来彼此通信。When displaying drawing area 640, device 699 can detect user input 650 with a swipe that resembles a smiley face. In response, device 699 displays a visual representation 654 of the detected input 650. Turning to Figure 6D, after a period of time, device 699 sends data to device 600 notifying device 600 of the detected input 650. Device 699 also fades out visual representation 654 (as indicated by dotted line 656). Since device 600 has already displayed drawing area 630, when data representing input 650 is received from device 699, device 650 displays a visual representation 660 (e.g., a smiley face) of input 650. In this way, users of devices 600 and 699 can communicate with each other using touch-based electronic communication.

在一些实施例中,由淡出所显示的可视表示的屏幕上的动画去除显示的笔画的可视表示。在一些实施例中,淡出从可视表示的一端到另一端而发生,这符合所表示的笔画的开始和结束。例如,可视表示660(类似于笑脸)可以从左眼到右眼并且到嘴淡出,如以该顺序绘制的那样。In some embodiments, the displayed visual representation of the stroke is removed by an on-screen animation that fades out the displayed visual representation. In some embodiments, the fade occurs from one end of the visual representation to the other, which corresponds to the beginning and end of the represented stroke. For example, the visual representation 660 (similar to a smiley face) can fade from the left eye to the right eye and to the mouth, as drawn in that order.

在一些实施例中,轻扫输入的动力学被反应在其可视表示中。例如,如果输入650中的初始轻扫移动很快但是轻扫输入650中的后来移动很慢,则随着设备600渲染可视表示660(并且随着设备699渲染可视表示654),与指示在其中笔画被绘制的方式的动力学信息一致,首先快速显示笔画并且然后朝向结束缓慢地显示笔画。如另一示例,在可视表示654和660的显示期间,也表示轻扫输入650的移动中的抖动。动力学信息也可以被包括在设备600与699之间发送的数据中。In some embodiments, the dynamics of the swipe input are reflected in its visual representation. For example, if the initial swipe movement in input 650 is fast but the subsequent movement in swipe input 650 is slow, then as device 600 renders visual representation 660 (and as device 699 renders visual representation 654), the stroke is first displayed quickly and then slowly toward the end, consistent with the dynamics information indicating the manner in which the stroke was drawn. As another example, during the display of visual representations 654 and 660, jitter in the movement of swipe input 650 is also indicated. Dynamics information can also be included in the data sent between devices 600 and 699.

在一些实施例中,随着在屏幕上显示轻扫输入的可视表示,反映轻扫输入的部分之间的暂停。例如,如果轻扫输入650的笑脸的眼睛被绘制有中间暂停,则眼睛被绘制有与它们在设备600和699上被显示的相同的中间暂停量(或者,成比例的暂停量)。In some embodiments, as the visual representation of the swipe input is displayed on the screen, the pauses between portions of the swipe input are reflected. For example, if the eyes of the smiley face of swipe input 650 are drawn with intermediate pauses, the eyes are drawn with the same amount of intermediate pauses (or, proportional amounts of pauses) as they are displayed on devices 600 and 699.

在一些实施例中,绘图区域包括用于选择在显示轻扫输入的可视表示中使用的颜色的颜色选择机制。图6E图示了示例性颜色选择机制,被称为颜色拾取器。如所示出的,设备600正在显示具有颜色拾取器可供件672的绘图区域670。虽然没有被示出,但是以当前颜色显示颜色拾取器可供件672,这意味着在设备600与设备699二者中以可供件672的颜色来显示由设备600的用户绘制的笔画。In some embodiments, the drawing area includes a color selection mechanism for selecting a color to use in displaying the visual representation of the swipe input. FIG6E illustrates an exemplary color selection mechanism, referred to as a color picker. As shown, device 600 is displaying drawing area 670 with color picker affordance 672. Although not shown, color picker affordance 672 is displayed in the current color, meaning that strokes drawn by the user of device 600 are displayed in the color of affordance 672 in both device 600 and device 699.

用户可以选择颜色拾取器可供件672来显示颜色选择用户界面680。颜色选择UI680具有表示之前(例如,最近)使用的颜色的可供件。用户可以选择所显示的可供件中的一个可供件以将所表示的颜色选择作为当前绘图颜色。颜色选择UI 680可以包括用于调用调色板的可供件682。响应于可供件682的用户选择,设备600显示为用户选择提供颜色的光谱的调色板用户界面690。用户可以选择调色板692的一部分以将对应的颜色选择作为当前绘图颜色。A user can select color picker affordance 672 to display color selection user interface 680. Color selection UI 680 has affordances representing previously (e.g., most recently) used colors. The user can select one of the displayed affordances to select the represented color as the current drawing color. Color selection UI 680 can include affordance 682 for invoking a color palette. In response to the user selection of affordance 682, device 600 displays a color palette user interface 690 that provides a spectrum of colors for the user to select. The user can select a portion of color palette 692 to select the corresponding color as the current drawing color.

在一些实施例中,设备600具有大于一个调色板用户界面。例如,调色板可以被分组,以用于经由附加的调色板用户界面进行呈现。如图6E中所示出的,调色板用户界面690可以具有用于指示可用的颜色的页数以及用于指示页面的集合内的当前页的顺序的分页指示符694。在图示的示例中,在显示UI 690时,响应于第一方向或者第二方向(例如,水平轻扫)上的轻扫输入,设备600显示附加调色板用户界面696。In some embodiments, the device 600 has more than one palette user interface. For example, palettes can be grouped for presentation via additional palette user interfaces. As shown in FIG6E , the palette user interface 690 can have a paging indicator 694 for indicating the number of pages of available colors and for indicating the order of the current page within the set of pages. In the illustrated example, when displaying UI 690, in response to a swipe input in a first direction or a second direction (e.g., a horizontal swipe), the device 600 displays an additional palette user interface 696.

页面上的颜色的排序可以基于颜色的使用频率、颜色的使用新近性或者二者的结合。用户可以选择调色板698的一部分以将对应的颜色选择作为当前绘图颜色。在从调色板UI选择颜色时,设备600返回绘图区域670。更新颜色拾取器可供件672以反映当前所选的颜色。The order of colors on the page can be based on the frequency of use of the colors, the recency of use of the colors, or a combination of the two. The user can select a portion of the color palette 698 to select the corresponding color as the current drawing color. When a color is selected from the color palette UI, the device 600 returns to the drawing area 670. The color picker affordance 672 is updated to reflect the currently selected color.

暂时地回到图6B-6D,在一些实施例中,颜色拾取器可供件提供附加的用户界面功能。如图6C中所描绘的,设备699有时在绘图区域640中显示颜色拾取器可供件646,但是在其他时候隐藏颜色拾取器可供件646。例如,在一些实施例中,当显示传入的通信(例如,可视表示642)时,设备699没有示出颜色拾取器可供件。相反,在可视表示642已经逐渐消失(如经由虚线644所图示的)之后,示出颜色拾取器可供件646。在这些实施例中,绘图区域中的颜色拾取器可供件的呈现向正接受触摸输入的用户发信号。再次重申,在这些实施例中,当显示传入的通信(例如,可视表示642)时,设备暂时地停止接收绘图输入,以使得可以不间断地显示传入的通信。在某些时候,隐藏颜色拾取器可供件(例如,646),以指示至少对于绘图区域(例如,640)中的显示的表示,正在忽略绘图输入。Returning temporarily to Figure 6B-6D, in some embodiments, color picker affordances provide additional user interface functionality. As depicted in Figure 6C, device 699 sometimes displays color picker affordances 646 in drawing area 640, but hides color picker affordances 646 at other times. For example, in some embodiments, when displaying incoming communication (e.g., visual representation 642), device 699 does not illustrate color picker affordances. On the contrary, after visual representation 642 has gradually disappeared (as illustrated via dotted line 644), color picker affordances 646 are illustrated. In these embodiments, the presentation of the color picker affordance in the drawing area signals the user who is receiving touch input. Once again, reiterate, in these embodiments, when displaying incoming communication (e.g., visual representation 642), device temporarily stops receiving drawing input so that incoming communication can be displayed uninterruptedly. At some point, the color picker affordance (e.g., 646) is hidden to indicate that drawing input is being ignored, at least for the displayed representation in the drawing area (e.g., 640).

作为另一示例,在一些实施例中,当用户目前正在绘图时,对传入的通信进行排队,以在当前绘图被发送之后进行显示。在这些实施例中,在发送绘图并且显示排队的绘图之后,在此期间用户不能够自己绘图。在有些时候,隐藏颜色拾取器可供件(例如,646),以指示至少对于绘图区域(例如,640)中的显示的表示,正在忽略绘图输入。As another example, in some embodiments, while a user is currently drawing, incoming communications are queued for display after the current drawing is sent. In these embodiments, after the drawing is sent and the queued drawing is displayed, the user cannot draw their own drawings during this time. At some times, the color picker affordance (e.g., 646) is hidden to indicate that drawing input is being ignored, at least for the displayed representation in the drawing area (e.g., 640).

2、附加的示例性通信技术2. Additional Exemplary Communication Technologies

图7A-7E图示了在电子设备700与799的用户之间的附加的示例性触摸通信技术。在一些实施例中,设备700和700是设备100、300和/或500(图1、图3和图5)。7A-7E illustrate additional exemplary touch communication techniques between users of electronic devices 700 and 799. In some embodiments, devices 700 and 799 are devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1, 3, and 5).

注意力现在转向设备700如何将其触摸屏上的不连续的叩击转化成电子触摸通信。在图7A中,设备700和799参与通信会话。设备700接收在绘图区域710中的位置714处的用户输入712。表示位置714处的用户输入712的数据由设备700向设备799发送。在接收到该数据时,设备799在绘图区域720中显示输入的可视表示722。设备799在对应于位置714的位置处在屏幕上绘制可视表示。在输入712之后,设备700可以在不同的位置718处接收附加的用户输入716。表示在位置718处的用户输入716的数据由设备700向设备799发送。在接收到该数据时,设备799显示输入716的可视表示724。如之前的,可视表示724的屏幕上的位置对应于触摸输入716的位置718。Attention now turns to how device 700 converts discrete taps on its touch screen into electronic touch communications. In FIG7A , devices 700 and 799 are engaged in a communication session. Device 700 receives user input 712 at position 714 in drawing area 710. Data representing user input 712 at position 714 is sent by device 700 to device 799. Upon receiving this data, device 799 displays a visual representation 722 of the input in drawing area 720. Device 799 draws the visual representation on the screen at a position corresponding to position 714. Following input 712, device 700 may receive additional user input 716 at a different position 718. Data representing user input 716 at position 718 is sent by device 700 to device 799. Upon receiving this data, device 799 displays a visual representation 724 of input 716. As before, the on-screen position of visual representation 724 corresponds to position 718 of touch input 716.

诸如触摸接触712和716之类的触摸接触(例如,绘制笔画、单指叩击、多指叩击)的检测和显示可以由事件分类器170、事件识别器180以及事件处理机190(图1B)实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171在触敏表面显示器112上检测接触,并且事件分派器模块174向应用136-1递送事件信息。应用136-1的相应事件识别器180比较事件信息与相应事件定义186,并且确定在触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或者子事件,诸如,单指接触、多指触摸接触或者轻扫。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或者子事件时,事件识别器180激活与事件或者子事件的检测相关联的事件处理机190。事件处理机190可以利用或调用数据更新器176或者对象更新器177以更新应用内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理机190访问相应的GUI更新器178以更新由应用显示的内容。Detection and display of touch contacts such as touch contacts 712 and 716 (e.g., drawing strokes, single-finger taps, multi-finger taps) can be implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190 (Figure 1B). Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contacts on touch-sensitive surface display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to application 136-1. A corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with a corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as a single-finger contact, a multi-finger touch contact, or a swipe. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 can utilize or call data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, the event handler 190 accesses the corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application.

在一些实施例中,可视表示722在触摸输入714的持续时期内被显示,这意味着可视表示722保持显示直到触摸输入714被释放。在一些实施例中,可视表示722被显示一定持续时间,这意味着在可视表示722已经被显示一段持续时期之后,从显示中去除可视表示722,而不管触摸输入714是否已经被释放。在一些实施例中,通过淡出来将可视表示722从显示器中去除。In some embodiments, visual representation 722 is displayed for the duration of touch input 714, meaning that visual representation 722 remains displayed until touch input 714 is released. In some embodiments, visual representation 722 is displayed for a duration, meaning that visual representation 722 is removed from display after visual representation 722 has been displayed for a duration, regardless of whether touch input 714 has been released. In some embodiments, visual representation 722 is removed from the display by fading out.

虽然可视表示722可以是任何屏幕上的图形输出,诸如图像、动画图像、直线绘制等,但是应当注意,可视表示722表示触摸输入(在外部电子设备上已经被接收的)。在可视表示722的上下文中,“表示”意味着可视信息至少通信关于触摸输入的一些信息。可以被通信的信息的示例包括触摸的位置、持续时间、强度、触摸的接触大小以及组成触摸的触摸对象(例如,手指)的数目。因此,以下示例性触摸的可视表示是代表性的:While visual representation 722 can be any on-screen graphical output, such as an image, an animated image, a line drawing, etc., it should be noted that visual representation 722 represents a touch input (that has been received on an external electronic device). In the context of visual representation 722, "representation" means that the visual information communicates at least some information about the touch input. Examples of information that can be communicated include the location of the touch, duration, intensity, contact size of the touch, and the number of touch objects (e.g., fingers) that make up the touch. Therefore, the following exemplary visual representations of touch are representative:

·位于对应于检测到的触摸的位置的位置处的图像;An image located at a position corresponding to the position of the detected touch;

·对于对应于检测到的触摸的持续时间的持续时间显示的图像;An image displayed for a duration corresponding to the duration of the detected touch;

·根据触摸接触的大小而定大小的图像(例如,椭圆形);或者An image sized according to the size of the touch contact (e.g., an oval); or

·对应于检测到的触摸的强度的颜色方案(例如,热图);A color scheme (e.g., a heat map) corresponding to the intensity of the detected touch;

然而,与此相反,由于检测到一些触摸输入,因此无需多说,即使其显示由触摸输入造成,简单显示的一般图像也不应该被认为是代表性的。However, in contrast to this, since some touch input is detected, it goes without saying that a simply displayed general image should not be considered representative even if its display is caused by the touch input.

在一些实施例中,可视表示722是圆形的、椭圆形的或者卵圆形的。可视表示722的大小可以指示触摸输入714的接触大小,例如用户的手指的大小。在一些实施例中,可视表示722包括多个圆、椭圆或者卵圆。可以同中心地显示形状。当可视表示722包括多个几何形状时,形状的数目可以提供暗示或者对应于接触的强度的可视表示。同样,当可视表示722包括多个形状时,随着可视表示722从屏幕显示器上退出,形状可以逐渐地淡出,类似于水中的涟漪,其提供了时间指示。In some embodiments, visual representation 722 is circular, elliptical, or oval. The size of visual representation 722 can indicate the size of the contact of touch input 714, such as the size of the user's finger. In some embodiments, visual representation 722 includes multiple circles, ellipses, or ovals. The shapes can be displayed concentrically. When visual representation 722 includes multiple geometric shapes, the number of shapes can provide a visual representation that suggests or corresponds to the intensity of the contact. Similarly, when visual representation 722 includes multiple shapes, as visual representation 722 exits the screen display, the shapes can gradually fade out, similar to ripples in water, which provides an indication of time.

在一些实施例中,使得设备799上的可视表示722和724的显示所要求的触摸输入(例如,712和716)是单指叩击,这意味着设备700上的多指触摸将不会在设备799上产生相同的可视表示,并且设备700上的单指轻扫也将不会产生相同的可视表示。在一些实施例中,可视表示722和724的显示伴随有可听和/或触觉输出。In some embodiments, the touch input required to cause display of visual representations 722 and 724 on device 799 (e.g., 712 and 716) is a single-finger tap, meaning that a multi-finger touch on device 700 will not produce the same visual representation on device 799, and a single-finger swipe on device 700 will not produce the same visual representation. In some embodiments, the display of visual representations 722 and 724 is accompanied by audible and/or tactile output.

在一些实施例中,设备799能够显示可视表示722和/或724,而不管其当前是否在显示绘图区域。也就是说,即使设备799没有活跃地运行电子触摸通信应用,设备799仍然可以能够显示可视表示。相反,设备799可以响应于关于单指叩击712和/或716的传入数据而简单开始振动和/或显示可视表示722和/或724。在一些实施例中,可视表示的显示伴随有触觉输出。在一些实施例中,首先提供触觉输出,并且如由输入(诸如,加速度计输入或者与看着设备的用户相关联的照相机输入)所确定的,在用户已经将设备移动到查看位置之后,可视表示的显示出现。In certain embodiments, device 799 can display visual representation 722 and/or 724, regardless of whether it is currently displaying a drawing area. That is, even if device 799 does not actively run an electronic touch communication application, device 799 can still be able to display a visual representation. On the contrary, device 799 can simply start vibration and/or display visual representation 722 and/or 724 in response to the incoming data about single-finger tapping 712 and/or 716. In certain embodiments, the display of the visual representation is accompanied by tactile output. In certain embodiments, tactile output is first provided, and as determined by input (such as, accelerometer input or camera input associated with a user looking at the device), after the user has moved the device to the viewing position, the display of the visual representation occurs.

注意力现在转向设备700如何将重复的不连续的叩击转化为电子触摸通信。在图7B中,设备700正在显示电话簿联系人用户界面730,在一些实施例中,其为联系人用户界面610(图6A)。电话簿联系人UI 730具有表示电话簿联系人的可供件731-734。当设备700接收作为双叩击触摸输入的用户输入736时,设备700向设备799发送对应于检测到的双叩击的数据。作为响应,设备799从不活跃状态转变到提醒740的显示,指示设备700的用户已经发送通信。在一些实施例中,提醒740伴随有可听和/或触觉输出。可听和/或触觉输出可以对应于由设备700检测的双叩击的数目。例如,设备799可以响应于在设备700处检测的每个双叩击而产生不连续的(即,不同的)振动。Attention now turns to how device 700 converts repeated, discontinuous taps into electronic touch communications. In FIG7B , device 700 is displaying phonebook contacts user interface 730, which in some embodiments is contacts user interface 610 ( FIG6A ). Phonebook contacts UI 730 has affordances 731-734 representing phonebook contacts. When device 700 receives user input 736 as a double tap touch input, device 700 sends data corresponding to the detected double tap to device 799. In response, device 799 transitions from an inactive state to a display of reminder 740, indicating that the user of device 700 has sent a communication. In some embodiments, reminder 740 is accompanied by an audible and/or tactile output. The audible and/or tactile output can correspond to the number of double taps detected by device 700. For example, device 799 can generate discontinuous (i.e., different) vibrations in response to each double tap detected at device 700.

注意力现在转向设备700如何将其触摸屏上的持续的触摸接触转化成电子触摸通信。在图7C中,设备检测用户输入752,其为绘图区域710中的双指触摸接触。作为响应,设备700向设备799发送表示多指输入的数据。在接收该数据时,设备799在绘图区域740上显示图像754。在一些实施例中,图像754是心形的图像。设备799继续显示图像754直到从设备700释放双指触摸752。Attention now turns to how device 700 converts sustained touch contact on its touch screen into electronic touch communication. In FIG7C , the device detects user input 752, which is a two-finger touch contact in drawing area 710. In response, device 700 sends data representing the multi-finger input to device 799. Upon receiving this data, device 799 displays image 754 on drawing area 740. In some embodiments, image 754 is a heart-shaped image. Device 799 continues to display image 754 until two-finger touch 752 is released from device 700.

诸如触摸接触752之类的触摸接触(例如,绘制笔画、单指叩击、多指叩击)的检测和显示可以由事件分类器170、事件识别器180以及事件处理机190(图1B)实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171在触敏表面显示器112上检测接触,并且事件分派器模块174向应用136-1递送事件信息。应用136-1的相应事件识别器180比较事件信息与相应事件定义186,并且确定在触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或者子事件,诸如,单指接触、多指触摸接触或者轻扫。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或者子事件时,事件识别器180激活与事件或者子事件的检测相关联的事件处理机190。事件处理机190可以利用或调用数据更新器176或者对象更新器177以更新应用内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理机190访问相应的GUI更新器178以更新由应用显示的内容。Detection and display of touch contacts such as touch contact 752 (e.g., drawing a stroke, a single-finger tap, a multi-finger tap) can be implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190 (Figure 1B). Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contacts on touch-sensitive surface display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to application 136-1. A corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with a corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as a single-finger contact, a multi-finger touch contact, or a swipe. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 can utilize or call data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, the event handler 190 accesses the corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application.

在一些实施例中,如图7C中所示出的,图像754搏动以使得其大小随时间变化。在一些实施例中,图像754的搏动加入了来自设备799的触觉和/或音频。在一些实施例中,设备700具有感测其用户的心率的皮电反应(GSR)传感器,并且向设备799发送心率信息,以使得设备799可以与检测到生物计量信息一致地搏动图像754。图像754的搏动也可以伴随有可听和触觉输出。例如,设备799可以与每个可视脉冲同步振动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 7C, image 754 pulsates so that its size changes over time. In some embodiments, the pulsation of image 754 is accompanied by tactile and/or audio from device 799. In some embodiments, device 700 has a galvanic skin response (GSR) sensor that senses the heart rate of its user and sends heart rate information to device 799 so that device 799 can pulsate image 754 in accordance with detected biometric information. The pulsation of image 754 can also be accompanied by audible and tactile output. For example, device 799 can vibrate in synchronization with each visual pulse.

在一些实施例中,设备799能够显示图像754,而不管其当前是否正在显示绘图区域。也就是说,即使设备799没有活跃地运行电子触摸通信应用,设备799仍然可以能够显示图像754。相反,设备799可以响应于关于多指叩击752的传入数据而简单开始振动和/或显示图像754。在一些实施例中,图像的显示伴随有触觉输出。在一些实施例中,首先提供触觉输出,并且如由输入(诸如,加速度计输入或者与看着设备的用户相关联的照相机输入)所确定的,在用户已经将设备移动到查看位置之后,图像显示出现。In some embodiments, device 799 can display image 754 regardless of whether it is currently displaying a drawing area. That is, even if device 799 is not actively running an electronic touch communication application, device 799 can still be able to display image 754. Instead, device 799 can simply begin vibrating and/or displaying image 754 in response to incoming data about multi-finger taps 752. In some embodiments, the display of the image is accompanied by a tactile output. In some embodiments, the tactile output is first provided, and as determined by an input (such as an accelerometer input or a camera input associated with a user looking at the device), the image display appears after the user has moved the device to a viewing position.

注意力现在转向设备700如何在电子触摸通信会话适应口头输入。在图7D中,在设备799正在显示绘图区域720时,设备700正在绘图区域710。绘图区域710和720具有表示进行中的电子触摸通信会话中的早期通信的画刷笔画的可视表示762和764。在显示绘图区域710时,设备700检测输入机构772的激活。在一些实施例中,输入机构是机械按钮。对于激活的持续时间,设备700记录向设备提供的输入。也就是说,设备700的用户可以提供随后被记录的口头消息。在释放输入机构772时,设备700向设备799发送音频记录,其中记录被回放。如图7D中所描绘的,当设备700在记录时,设备799继续显示绘图区域720,以使得设备799的用户可以继续参与通信会话。Attention now turns to how device 700 accommodates verbal input during an electronic touch communication session. In FIG. 7D , device 700 is displaying drawing area 710 while device 799 is displaying drawing area 720. Drawing areas 710 and 720 have visual representations 762 and 764 of brush strokes representing earlier communications in the ongoing electronic touch communication session. While displaying drawing area 710, device 700 detects activation of input mechanism 772. In some embodiments, the input mechanism is a mechanical button. For the duration of activation, device 700 records input provided to the device. In other words, the user of device 700 can provide a verbal message that is subsequently recorded. Upon releasing input mechanism 772, device 700 sends an audio recording to device 799, where the recording is played back. As depicted in FIG. 7D , while device 700 is recording, device 799 continues to display drawing area 720 so that the user of device 799 can continue to participate in the communication session.

注意力现在转向设备700如何可以允许在电子触摸通信会话的参与者之间的联系的备选方法。图7E图示了上下文用户界面790,在一些实施例中,该上下文用户界面790可以从绘图区域710中被调用。如所示出的,设备700正在显示绘图区域710并且接收触摸输入792。触摸输入792具有高的特性接触强度,这意味着其为深接触。在一些实施例中,具有高于阈值强度的特性强度的接触被认为是高强度接触。响应于在显示绘图区域710的同时检测到高强度触摸792,设备700显示上下文用户界面790,其具有用于发起与电子触摸通信会话的(一个或多个)参与者(例如,图6A中的联系人A)的其它形式的通信的可供件。应当注意,如以上参考图7A-7C所讨论的,低于阈值的触摸被解释为单指接触(诸如,叩击和轻扫)和/或多指触摸。Attention now turns to alternative methods for how device 700 can allow for contact between participants in an electronic touch communication session. Figure 7E illustrates a contextual user interface 790, which, in some embodiments, can be invoked from drawing area 710. As shown, device 700 is displaying drawing area 710 and receiving touch input 792. Touch input 792 has a high characteristic contact intensity, meaning it is a deep contact. In some embodiments, a contact with a characteristic intensity above a threshold intensity is considered a high-intensity contact. In response to detecting a high-intensity touch 792 while displaying drawing area 710, device 700 displays contextual user interface 790 with an affordance for initiating other forms of communication with (one or more) participants in the electronic touch communication session (e.g., contact A in Figure 6A). It should be noted that, as discussed above with reference to Figures 7A-7C, touches below the threshold are interpreted as single-finger contacts (such as taps and swipes) and/or multi-finger touches.

例如,上下文用户界面790具有可供件794,当其被选择时,发起与联系人A的电话呼叫(音频和/或视频)。上下文用户界面790还具有可供件796,当其被选择时,发起写给联系人A的草稿电子邮件。上下文用户界面790还具有可供件798,当其被选择时,发起写给联系人A的消息(例如,经由诸如SMS和MMS等的服务的短消息、经由诸如由加尼福尼亚州库比蒂诺的Apple公司提供的等的服务的文本消息)。For example, contextual user interface 790 has affordance 794 that, when selected, initiates a phone call (audio and/or video) with contact A. Contextual user interface 790 also has affordance 796 that, when selected, initiates a draft email to contact A. Contextual user interface 790 also has affordance 798 that, when selected, initiates a message (e.g., a short message via services such as SMS and MMS, a text message via services such as those provided by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California) to contact A.

3、备选通信模型3. Alternative Communication Models

注意力现在转向在参考图8和图9A-9B的一些实施例中使用的设备之间的电子触摸通信的其他模型。Attention now turns to other models of electronic touch communication between devices used in some embodiments with reference to Figures 8 and 9A-9B.

在一些实施例中,在由一个参与者发起并且由接收的参与者接受的会话之后发生电子触摸通信。参考图8讨论了这一方面。在图8中,设备800(在一些实施例中为设备100、300或者500(图1、图3和图5))正在显示电话簿联系人用户界面810。响应于所显示的可供件811-814中的一个可供件的用户的选择,设备800显示联系人信息用户界面820,在这种情况下,对于联系人“A”其由可供件811表示。用户通过触摸用户界面820来将联系人“A”继续邀请到通信会话。作为响应,设备800向设备899发送将联系人“A”邀请到通信的请求,并且显示具有指示联系人“A”被邀请的指示834的用户界面830。同时,与联系人“A”相关联的设备899从其不活跃状态转变到提醒840的显示,其示出了设备800的用户(在该情况下为联系人“Z”)正在请求电子触摸通信。In some embodiments, electronic touch communication occurs after a conversation initiated by one participant and accepted by the receiving participant. This aspect is discussed with reference to FIG8 . In FIG8 , device 800 (in some embodiments, device 100 , 300 , or 500 ( FIG1 , FIG3 , and FIG5 )) is displaying phonebook contacts user interface 810 . In response to a user selecting one of the displayed affordances 811 - 814 , device 800 displays contact information user interface 820 , represented in this case by affordance 811 for contact “A”. The user continues to invite contact “A” to the communication session by touching user interface 820 . In response, device 800 sends a request to device 899 to invite contact “A” to the communication and displays user interface 830 with an indication 834 indicating that contact “A” is invited. Simultaneously, device 899 associated with contact “A” transitions from its inactive state to displaying an alert 840 , which shows that the user of device 800 (in this case, contact “Z”) is requesting electronic touch communication.

在一些实施例中,设备800的用户可以通过导航离开用户界面830(诸如,通过轻扫输入或者设备上的另一输入机构的激活)来取消邀请。在一些实施例中,设备899的用户可以通过触摸提醒840来接受未决的邀请。用户还可以通过轻扫离开提醒840(例如,以向上或者向下的方向)来拒绝邀请。如果接受了要求,则设备800和899继续分别地显示绘图区域850和860,并且从而建立了双向的通信会话。因此,如这里所使用的,在(i)一个用户向另一用户发送用于通信的邀请和(ii)接收的用户接受之后,建立双向通信“会话”。如果拒绝了邀请(未示出),则设备800返回到联系人信息用户界面820并且识别899返回到其之前(不活跃)状态。In some embodiments, the user of device 800 can cancel the invitation by navigating away from user interface 830 (such as, by activating another input mechanism on the device by swiping input or). In some embodiments, the user of device 899 can accept the pending invitation by touching reminder 840. The user can also reject the invitation by swiping away reminder 840 (for example, in an upward or downward direction). If the request is accepted, devices 800 and 899 continue to display drawing areas 850 and 860 respectively, and thereby establish a two-way communication session. Therefore, as used herein, after (i) one user sends an invitation for communication to another user and (ii) the received user accepts, a two-way communication "session" is established. If the invitation is rejected (not shown), device 800 returns to contact information user interface 820 and identification 899 returns to its previous (inactive) state.

注意力现在转向参考图9A-9B的实施例,在该实施例中,电子触摸通信可以协作地参与通信会话。在图9,设备900(在一些实施例中为设备100、300或者500(图1、图3和图5))正在显示绘图区域910。设备999(在一些实施例中为设备100、300或者500(图1、图3和图5))正在显示绘图区域920。如所示出的,设备900检测轻扫输入912,其表示绘图区域910上的向下笔画914。作为响应,设备900显示检测到的笔画的可视表示916。可视表示916可以具有画刷笔画的外观。同时,设备900向设备999发送表示笔画914(例如,轻扫输入912)的数据。设备999在接收到该信息之后,在其绘图区域920中显示笔画的可视表示922。Attention now turns to the embodiment with reference to Figures 9A-9B, in which electronic touch communication can collaboratively participate in a communication session. In Figure 9, device 900 (in some embodiments, device 100, 300, or 500 (Figures 1, 3, and 5)) is displaying a drawing area 910. Device 999 (in some embodiments, device 100, 300, or 500 (Figures 1, 3, and 5)) is displaying a drawing area 920. As shown, device 900 detects a swipe input 912, which represents a downward stroke 914 on drawing area 910. In response, device 900 displays a visual representation 916 of the detected stroke. Visual representation 916 can have the appearance of a brush stroke. Simultaneously, device 900 sends data representing stroke 914 (e.g., swipe input 912) to device 999. Upon receiving this information, device 999 displays a visual representation 922 of the stroke in its drawing area 920.

两个用户可以继续绘图。如所示出的,设备900检测表示笔画928的附加的轻扫输入926,而设备999检测表示笔画932的附加的轻扫输入930。设备900显示轻扫输入926的可视表示936,并且识别999显示轻扫输入930的可视表示940。表示笔画928(轻扫输入926)和笔画932(轻扫输入930)二者的数据由设备交换,这意味着设备900向设备999发送表示笔画928(例如,轻扫输入926)的数据,并且设备999向设备900发送表示笔画932(例如,轻扫输入930)的数据。在信息的该交换之后,两个设备显示对应于接收到的信息的可视表示。在设备900的情况下,除了可视表示916和936,可视表示946也被显示。在设备999中,除了可视表示922和940,可视表示942也被显示。在一些实施例中,所显示的可视表示具有画刷笔画的外观。如可以看出的,通过这种方式,设备900和999的用户可以互相地参与绘图会话,特别是笑脸的绘图。Two users can continue drawing. As shown, device 900 detects additional swipe input 926 representing strokes 928, while device 999 detects additional swipe input 930 representing strokes 932. Device 900 displays visual representation 936 of swipe input 926, and recognition 999 displays visual representation 940 of swipe input 930. Data representing both strokes 928 (swipe input 926) and strokes 932 (swipe input 930) are exchanged by the devices, which means that device 900 sends data representing strokes 928 (e.g., swipe input 926) to device 999, and device 999 sends data representing strokes 932 (e.g., swipe input 930) to device 900. After this exchange of information, the two devices display visual representations corresponding to the received information. In the case of device 900, in addition to visual representations 916 and 936, visual representation 946 is also displayed. In device 999, in addition to visual representations 922 and 940, visual representation 942 is also displayed. In some embodiments, the displayed visual representation has the appearance of brush strokes. As can be seen, in this way, users of devices 900 and 999 can mutually participate in a drawing session, particularly the drawing of a smiley face.

为了给用于附加的绘图的绘图区域640和642腾出地方,在一些实施例中,在给定的持续时间之后,去除所显示的可视表示。持续时间可以是预定的,例如,1秒、2秒或者3秒。如图9B所示出的,由于可视表示916和930由较早的用户输入造成,因此首先移除可视表示916和930。随后从绘图区域中去除可视表示936和946以及942和940,这是因为它们表示后来的用户输入。In order to make room for drawing areas 640 and 642 for additional drawings, in some embodiments, the displayed visual representations are removed after a given duration. The duration can be predetermined, for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds. As shown in FIG. 9B , since visual representations 916 and 930 are caused by earlier user input, visual representations 916 and 930 are removed first. Subsequently, visual representations 936 and 946, as well as 942 and 940, are removed from the drawing area because they represent later user input.

对于用户来说,很可能错过传入的电子触摸通信(例如,电源中断或者没有网络连接)。对于用户来说,也有可能忽视与传入的通信相关联的触觉和/或可视输出。在一些实施例中,设备900显示标识错过的通信的错过的通信的指示符。结合图9C讨论了这方面。图9C描绘了电话簿联系人用户界面990(在一些实施例中为电话簿联系人用户界面610(图6A))。电话簿联系人UI 990包括表示电话簿联系人的多个可供件,包括表示联系人“D”的可供件992。指示符994邻近可供件992被显示(意味着指示符994在所有显示的可供件之中最接近可供件992)。指示符994向设备900的用户指示错过了来自联系人“D”的传入的电子触摸通信。可选地,指示符994的可视外观传达了关于错过的电子触摸通信的附加信息。例如,指示符994可以具有用于指示错过的提醒(提醒638,图6A)的特定的形状、针对提醒的错过的请求(提醒840,图8)、错过的单叩击(图7A)、错过的双叩击(图7B)、错过的多指触摸(图7C)等。作为另一示例,指示符904的大小可以反映错过的通信的数目。在一些实施例中,可以邻近联系人可供件显示多个指示符,以指示已经错过多种类型的通信。It is very likely for a user to miss an incoming electronic touch communication (e.g., a power outage or no network connection). It is also possible for a user to ignore the tactile and/or visual output associated with the incoming communication. In some embodiments, device 900 displays an indicator of the missed communication that identifies the missed communication. This aspect is discussed in conjunction with Figure 9C. Figure 9C depicts phone book contacts user interface 990 (in some embodiments, phone book contacts user interface 610 (Figure 6A)). Phone book contacts UI 990 includes multiple affordances representing phone book contacts, including affordance 992 representing contact "D". Indicator 994 is displayed adjacent to affordance 992 (meaning that indicator 994 is closest to affordance 992 among all displayed affordances). Indicator 994 indicates to the user of device 900 that an incoming electronic touch communication from contact "D" has been missed. Optionally, the visual appearance of indicator 994 conveys additional information about the missed electronic touch communication. For example, indicator 994 can have a particular shape to indicate a missed reminder (reminder 638, Figure 6A), a missed request for a reminder (reminder 840, Figure 8), a missed single tap (Figure 7A), a missed double tap (Figure 7B), a missed multi-touch (Figure 7C), etc. As another example, the size of indicator 904 can reflect the number of missed communications. In some embodiments, multiple indicators can be displayed adjacent to a contact affordance to indicate that multiple types of communications have been missed.

在一些实施例中,电话簿联系人用户界面990显示关于当前没有被注册为关于设备900的联系人的电子触摸通信中各方的信息是可能的。例如,电话簿联系人UI 990可以示出设备990之前不知的人员的电话号码。在该示例中,电话簿联系人UI 990可以提供用于将之前不知的人员注册为联系人的添加可供件。In some embodiments, it is possible for phonebook contacts user interface 990 to display information about parties in electronic touch communications that are not currently registered as contacts with device 900. For example, phonebook contacts UI 990 may show phone numbers of people not previously known to device 990. In this example, phonebook contacts UI 990 may provide an add affordance for registering the previously unknown person as a contact.

在一些实施例中,电话簿联系人用户界面990被配置为显示用户指定的和/或系统定义的联系人的子集。在这些实施例中,电话簿联系人用户界面990显示关于不是用户指定的或者系统定义的联系人的电子触摸通信的各方的信息是可能的。例如,设备990可以最近已经从用户的经常联系人(不是用户收藏的联系人中的一个联系人)接收传入通信。在该示例中,电话簿联系人UI 990可以提供用于将该联系人指定为收藏联系人的添加可供件。作为另一示例,设备990可以已经最近从设备990之前不知的人员接收传入的通信。在该示例中,电话簿联系人UI 990可以提供用于将之前不知的人员注册为联系人(并且可选地将新添加的联系人指定为用户收藏)的添加可供件。In some embodiments, phonebook contacts user interface 990 is configured to display a subset of user-specified and/or system-defined contacts. In these embodiments, it is possible for phonebook contacts user interface 990 to display information about parties to an electronic touch communication that are not user-specified or system-defined contacts. For example, device 990 may have recently received an incoming communication from a user's frequent contact (not one of the user's favorite contacts). In this example, phonebook contacts UI 990 may provide an add affordance for designating the contact as a favorite contact. As another example, device 990 may have recently received an incoming communication from a person previously unknown to device 990. In this example, phonebook contacts UI 990 may provide an add affordance for registering the previously unknown person as a contact (and optionally designating the newly added contact as a user favorite).

4、示例性电子触摸通信过程4. Exemplary Electronic Touch Communication Process

注意力现在可以在设备100、300和/或500(图1、3、5)上被实施以执行以上参考图6A-6E、7A-7E、8以及9A-9C所描述的技术的过程。Attention may now be implemented on devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1, 3, 5) to perform the processes of the techniques described above with reference to FIGs. 6A-6E, 7A-7E, 8, and 9A-9C.

图10A-10C描绘了图示用于电子触摸通信的过程1000的流程图。在各个实施例中,过程1000可以由电子设备(诸如,设备100、300和/或500(图1、图3和图5))执行。在块1002处,显示表示联系人的多个可供件。可以由用户输入触发显示。可选地,所表示的联系人可以是可用的电话簿联系人的用户指定的子集,诸如用户的“收藏”联系人,或者系统定义的“白名单”或者“灰名单”。表示联系人的可供件的示例性显示是图6A中描绘的用户界面610。在块1004处,设备检测显示的可供件的用户选择,并且作为响应,显示标识所选的联系人的联系人信息。该信息可以包括联系人的姓名、图像、号码等。图6A提供了示例性联系人信息用户界面616。Figures 10A-10C depict a flowchart illustrating a process 1000 for electronic touch communication. In various embodiments, process 1000 can be performed by an electronic device, such as device 100, 300, and/or 500 (Figures 1, 3, and 5). At block 1002, multiple affordances representing contacts are displayed. The display can be triggered by user input. Optionally, the contacts represented can be a user-specified subset of available phone book contacts, such as the user's "favorites" contacts, or a system-defined "white list" or "grey list." An exemplary display of affordances representing contacts is the user interface 610 depicted in Figure 6A. At block 1004, the device detects a user selection of the displayed affordance and, in response, displays contact information identifying the selected contact. The information can include the contact's name, image, number, etc. Figure 6A provides an exemplary contact information user interface 616.

在块1006处,响应于所显示的可供件的用户选择,显示诸如绘图区域630(图6A)的画布。在一些实施例中,可选地,向所选的联系人或者与所选的联系人相关联的电子设备发送邀请,将联系人邀请到电子触摸通信。在一些实施例中,可选地,设备在显示绘图区域之前等待邀请的接受。At block 1006, in response to user selection of the displayed affordance, a canvas such as drawing area 630 ( FIG. 6A ) is displayed. In some embodiments, an invitation is optionally sent to the selected contact or an electronic device associated with the selected contact, inviting the contact to electronic touch communication. In some embodiments, the device optionally waits for acceptance of the invitation before displaying the drawing area.

当显示绘图区域时,在块1008处,检测到以轻扫形式的用户输入。在检测到用户输入时,过程继续到决定块1010,在决定块1010中,做出了关于输入是单指还是多指触摸输入的确定。如果输入是多指接触,则过程继续到1012,在1012中,设备向外部设备发送表示多指接触的数据。传输的数据向外部设备提供指示以生成诸如图7C中的图像754等的图像。如果输入是单指接触,过程继续到决定块1014,在决定块1014中,做出关于该单指输入是轻扫还是叩击的确定。如果单只输入是叩击,过程继续到块1016,在块1016中,向外部设备发送表示单指叩击的数据。传输的数据使得在外部设备上生成可视表示(诸如,图7A中的可视表示722)。传输的数据可以因此具有触发外部设备上的各个可视表示的显示的效果。While the drawing area is displayed, at block 1008, a user input in the form of a swipe is detected. Upon detecting the user input, the process continues to decision block 1010, where a determination is made as to whether the input is a single-finger or multi-finger touch input. If the input is a multi-finger touch, the process continues to 1012, where the device transmits data representing the multi-finger touch to an external device. The transmitted data provides instructions to the external device for generating an image, such as image 754 in FIG. 7C . If the input is a single-finger touch, the process continues to decision block 1014, where a determination is made as to whether the single-finger input is a swipe or a tap. If the single-finger touch input is a tap, the process continues to block 1016, where data representing the single-finger tap is transmitted to the external device. The transmitted data causes a visual representation (such as visual representation 722 in FIG. 7A ) to be generated on the external device. The transmitted data can thus have the effect of triggering the display of individual visual representations on the external device.

如果单指输入是轻扫,过程继续到块1018,在块1018中,设备显示轻扫输入的可视表示,诸如由图6B中的可视表示634表示的笑脸中的眼睛中的一个眼睛。在块1020处,做出关于在最后检测的轻扫之后是否过去了阈值时间量的确定。如果已经经过阈值时间量,则过程继续到块1022,在块1022中,设备向外部设备发送指示接收到的(一个或多个)轻扫输入的数据。传输的数据使得在外部设备上生成可视表示,诸如可视表示642(图6B)。如果还没有经过阈值时间量,则过程继续到块1024,在块1024,可以在绘图区域检测附加的轻扫。在块1024之后,过程返回到块1018,以使得在屏幕上显示任何附加地接收到的输入。根据需要块可以重复1018、1020以及1024的操作,直到存在对输入的一些结尾,例如,如由超过阈值持续时间的绘图输入的停止所指示的,用户完成了绘图。当这个发生时,过程继续到块1022,在块1022中,设备向外部设备发送指示接收到的轻扫输入的数据。传输的数据可以因此具有触发外部设备上的各个可视表示的显示的效果。If the single-finger input is a swipe, the process continues to block 1018, where the device displays a visual representation of the swipe input, such as one of the eyes in the smiling face represented by visual representation 634 in Figure 6B. At block 1020, a determination is made as to whether a threshold amount of time has passed since the last detected swipe. If the threshold amount of time has passed, the process continues to block 1022, where the device sends data indicating the received swipe input(s) to the external device. The transmitted data causes a visual representation, such as visual representation 642 (Figure 6B), to be generated on the external device. If the threshold amount of time has not passed, the process continues to block 1024, where additional swipes can be detected in the drawing area. After block 1024, the process returns to block 1018 to cause any additional received inputs to be displayed on the screen. The operations of blocks 1018, 1020, and 1024 may be repeated as needed until there is some end to the input, e.g., the user has finished drawing, as indicated by a cessation of drawing input exceeding a threshold duration. When this occurs, the process continues to block 1022, where the device transmits data indicating the received swipe input to the external device. The transmitted data may thus have the effect of triggering the display of various visual representations on the external device.

图11描绘了图示用于电子触摸通信的过程1100的流程图。在各个实施例中,过程1100可以由电子设备(诸如,设备100、300和/或500(图1、图3和图5))执行。在块1102处,在执行过程1100的电子设备处接收对应于由外部设备检测的输入的数据。接收到的数据可以表示传入的电子触摸通信。响应于接收到数据,电子设备产生触觉输出。在块1106处,做出关于在发出触觉输出之后的预定时间阈值内是否接收用户输入的确定。FIG11 depicts a flow diagram illustrating a process 1100 for electronic touch communication. In various embodiments, process 1100 can be performed by an electronic device, such as devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1, 3, and 5). At block 1102, data corresponding to an input detected by an external device is received at the electronic device performing process 1100. The received data can represent an incoming electronic touch communication. In response to receiving the data, the electronic device generates a tactile output. At block 1106, a determination is made as to whether a user input is received within a predetermined time threshold after the tactile output is emitted.

如果用户在时间阈值内提供输入,则过程继续到块1108,在块1108处,显示了关于传入的数据的通知(例如,图6A中的提醒638,图8中的提醒840)。在块1100处,接收所显示的提醒上的用户输入,并且作为响应,电子设备启动用于电子触摸通信的合适的应用,并且显示传入的数据的可视表示。If the user provides input within the time threshold, the process continues to block 1108 where a notification regarding the incoming data is displayed (e.g., reminder 638 in FIG. 6A , reminder 840 in FIG. 8 ). At block 1100 , user input is received on the displayed reminder, and in response, the electronic device launches an appropriate application for electronic touch communication and displays a visual representation of the incoming data.

在备选的实施例(图11中未示出)中,在块1110处,响应于在显示提醒的同时的用户输入,在没有打开附加的应用的情况下,电子设备显示传入的数据的可视表示。在该备选实施例中,在针对与发送者的电子触摸通信显示绘图画布之前,用户将需要采取附加的步骤来启动合适的电子触摸通信。然而,通过绕开应用的打开,电子设备可以能够更快地呈现接收到的信息,这在接收者只能够短暂地看一下传入的通信的情况下可能是有用的。In an alternative embodiment (not shown in FIG. 11 ), at block 1110 , in response to user input while displaying the reminder, the electronic device displays a visual representation of the incoming data without opening an additional application. In this alternative embodiment, the user will need to take additional steps to initiate the appropriate electronic touch communication before displaying the drawing canvas for the electronic touch communication with the sender. However, by bypassing the opening of the application, the electronic device may be able to present the received information more quickly, which may be useful in situations where the recipient is only able to glance at the incoming communication briefly.

如果用户没有在时间阈值内提供输入,过程继续到块1112,在块1112处,电子设备返回其之前的过程(或者不活跃状态)。在块1114处,在后来的时间,电子设备显示错过的传入的通信的指示。指示可以为图9C中所描绘的指示符994。If the user does not provide input within the time threshold, the process continues to block 1112, where the electronic device returns to its previous process (or inactive state). At block 1114, at a later time, the electronic device displays an indication of the missed incoming communication. The indication can be the indicator 994 depicted in Figure 9C.

图12描绘了图示用于电子触摸通信的过程1200的流程图。在各个实施例中,过程1200可以由电子设备(诸如,设备100、300和/或500(图1、图3和图5))执行。在块1202处,在执行过程1200的电子设备处接收对应于由外部设备检测到的输入的数据。接收到的数据可以表示传入电子触摸通信。在块1204处,响应于接收到数据,电子设备确定其是否活跃地运行适于处理电子触摸通信的开放应用。如果合适的应用是打开的,则过程继续到块1206,在块1206处,显示传入的数据的可视表示。例如,图6D图示了在两个设备600和699都正在显示绘图区域时,以这种方式(特别地相对于可视表示600的显示)处理传入的数据。如果合适的应用不是打开的,过程继续到块1208,在块1208处,显示关于传入的数据的通知(例如,图6B中的提醒638,图8中的提醒840)。在块1210处,接收所显示的提醒上的用户输入,并且作为响应,电子设备启动用于电子触摸通信的合适的应用,并且显示传入的数据的可视表示(例如,图6B中的绘图区域640中的可视表示642的显示)。Figure 12 depicts a flowchart illustrating a process 1200 for electronic touch communication. In various embodiments, process 1200 can be performed by an electronic device, such as device 100, 300, and/or 500 (Figures 1, 3, and 5). At block 1202, data corresponding to an input detected by an external device is received at the electronic device performing process 1200. The received data can represent an incoming electronic touch communication. At block 1204, in response to receiving the data, the electronic device determines whether it is actively running an open application suitable for processing electronic touch communication. If a suitable application is open, the process continues to block 1206, where a visual representation of the incoming data is displayed. For example, Figure 6D illustrates processing incoming data in this manner (particularly with respect to the display of visual representation 600) when both devices 600 and 699 are displaying a drawing area. If the appropriate application is not open, the process continues to block 1208 where a notification regarding the incoming data is displayed (e.g., alert 638 in FIG. 6B , alert 840 in FIG. 8 ). At block 1210 , user input is received on the displayed alert, and in response, the electronic device launches the appropriate application for electronic touch communication and displays a visual representation of the incoming data (e.g., display of visual representation 642 in drawing area 640 in FIG. 6B ).

图13示出了在一些实施例中执行以上描述的功能的电子设备1300的示例性功能块。如图13中所示出的,电子设备1300可以包括被配置为显示图形对象的显示单元1302;被配置为接收用户输入的人类输入接口单元1304;被配置为检测和与外部电子设备通信的一个或者多个RF单元1306;被配置用于为用户提供触觉、音频和/或可视反馈的一个或者多个反馈单元;以及耦合到显示单元1302、人类输入接口单元1304、(一个或多个)RF单元1306以及反馈单元1308的处理单元1310。在一些实施例中,处理单元1312被配置为支持电子触摸通信处理单元1312和显示使能单元1314。FIG13 illustrates exemplary functional blocks of an electronic device 1300 that performs the functions described above in some embodiments. As shown in FIG13 , electronic device 1300 may include a display unit 1302 configured to display graphical objects; a human input interface unit 1304 configured to receive user input; one or more RF units 1306 configured to detect and communicate with external electronic devices; one or more feedback units configured to provide tactile, audio, and/or visual feedback to the user; and a processing unit 1310 coupled to display unit 1302, human input interface unit 1304, RF unit(s) 1306, and feedback unit 1308. In some embodiments, processing unit 1312 is configured to support electronic touch communication processing unit 1312 and display enabling unit 1314.

在一些实施例中,显示使能单元1314被配置为引起用户界面(或者用户界面的一部分)结合显示单元1302的显示。例如,显示使能单元1314可以用于显示参考图6A-6E、7A-7E、8以及9A-9C所描述的一个或者多个用户界面。In some embodiments, the display enabling unit 1314 is configured to cause display of a user interface (or a portion of a user interface) in conjunction with the display unit 1302. For example, the display enabling unit 1314 can be used to display one or more of the user interfaces described with reference to Figures 6A-6E, 7A-7E, 8, and 9A-9C.

在一些实施例中,电子触摸通信处理单元1312被配置为根据以上参考图6A-6E、7A-7E、8以及9A-9C所讨论的示例来处理触摸通信。如参考图10A-10C、11以及12所讨论的,电子触摸通信处理单元1312可以确定何时发送表示电子触摸通信的传出的数据(例如,从接收输入以来是否已经过去必要的时间阈值)、何时去除屏幕上的可视表示(例如,是否已经过去必要的显示时间阈值)。In some embodiments, the electronic touch communication processing unit 1312 is configured to process touch communications according to the examples discussed above with reference to Figures 6A-6E, 7A-7E, 8, and 9A-9C. As discussed with reference to Figures 10A-10C, 11, and 12, the electronic touch communication processing unit 1312 can determine when to send outgoing data representing electronic touch communications (e.g., whether a necessary time threshold has passed since receiving the input) and when to remove the visual representation on the screen (e.g., whether a necessary display time threshold has passed).

图13的单元可以用于实现以上参考图6-12所描述的各种技术和方法。图13的单元可选地由硬件、软件或者硬件和软件的组合实现,以执行各个描述的实施例原理。本领域技术人员应当理解,图13中所描述的功能块可选地被组合或者被分离成子块以实现各个描述的示例的原理。因此,本文的描述可选地支持本文所描述的功能块的任何可能的组合或者分离或者更一步的定义。The units of Figure 13 can be used to implement the various techniques and methods described above with reference to Figures 6-12. The units of Figure 13 are optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to perform the principles of the embodiments described herein. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 13 are optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the examples described herein. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

根据一些实施例,图14示出了根据各个描述的实施例的原理配置的电子设备1400的功能块图。设备的功能块可选地由硬件、软件或者硬件和软件的组合实现,以执行各个描述的实施例原理。本领域技术人员应当理解,图14中所描述的功能块可选地被组合或者被分离成子块以实现各个描述的实施例的原理。因此,本文的描述可选地支持本文所描述的功能块的任何可能的组合或者分离或者更一步的定义。According to some embodiments, Figure 14 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1400 configured according to the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to perform the principles of the various described embodiments. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 14 are optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

如图14所示,电子设备1400包括被配置为显示图形用户界面的显示单元1402、被配置为接收接触的触敏表面单元1404、以及耦合到显示单元1402和触敏表面单元1404的处理单元1406。在一些实施例中,处理单元1406包括检测单元1408、显示使能单元1410、替换单元1412、发送单元1414、确定单元1416、淡出使能单元1418、接收单元1420、更新使能单元1422、缩放使能单元1424、记录单元1426以及停止单元1428。14 , electronic device 1400 includes a display unit 1402 configured to display a graphical user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 configured to receive contacts, and a processing unit 1406 coupled to display unit 1402 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1404. In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 includes a detecting unit 1408, a display enabling unit 1410, a replacing unit 1412, a sending unit 1414, a determining unit 1416, a fading enabling unit 1418, a receiving unit 1420, an updating enabling unit 1422, a scaling enabling unit 1424, a recording unit 1426, and a stopping unit 1428.

处理单元1406被配置为(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测用户输入,并且响应于检测到用户输入,(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能表示联系人的多个可供件的显示。处理单元1406被配置为(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测表示联系人的所显示的可供件的用户选择;响应于检测到所显示的可供件的用户选择,利用标识所选的联系人的联系人信息的显示来(例如,利用替换单元1412)替换多个可供件,所选的联系人由所选的可供件表示;在显示联系人信息时,(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测触敏显示器上的触摸;并且响应于检测到触摸:(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能绘图区域的显示,其中绘图区域响应于触摸输入。处理单元1406被进一步配置为在绘图区域中(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测表示第一笔画的第一触摸输入;在绘图区域中(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能第一笔画的可视表示的显示;并且(例如,利用发送单元1414)向与所选的联系人相关联的外部设备发送表示第一笔画的数据。Processing unit 1406 is configured to detect user input (e.g., using detection unit 1408) and, in response to detecting the user input, enable display of a plurality of affordances representing contacts (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410). Processing unit 1406 is configured to detect user selection of a displayed affordance representing contacts (e.g., using detection unit 1408); in response to detecting the user selection of the displayed affordance, replace the plurality of affordances (e.g., using replacing unit 1412) with display of contact information identifying the selected contact, the selected contact being represented by the selected affordance; while displaying the contact information, detect a touch on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., using detection unit 1408); and, in response to detecting the touch: enable display of a drawing area (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410), wherein the drawing area is responsive to the touch input. Processing unit 1406 is further configured to detect a first touch input representing a first stroke in the drawing area (e.g., using detection unit 1408); enable display of a visual representation of the first stroke in the drawing area (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410); and send data representing the first stroke to an external device associated with the selected contact (e.g., using sending unit 1414).

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为(例如,利用确定单元1416)确定在第一触摸输入之后是否经过第一预定持续时间,其中发送表示第一笔画的数据包括:响应于确定已经经过第一预定持续时间而发送数据。In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 is further configured to determine (e.g., using determination unit 1416) whether a first predetermined duration has passed after the first touch input, wherein sending data representing the first stroke includes: sending data in response to determining that the first predetermined duration has passed.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:在已经经过第一预定持续时间之前,在屏幕上的绘图区域中(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测表示第二笔画的第二触摸输入,其中第一笔画和第二笔画由中间时间量分离;并且(例如,利用发送单元1414)向与第二笔画和中间时间量相关联的外部设备发送数据。In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 is further configured to: detect (e.g., using detection unit 1408) a second touch input representing a second stroke in the drawing area on the screen before the first predetermined duration has elapsed, wherein the first stroke and the second stroke are separated by an intermediate time amount; and send (e.g., using sending unit 1414) data to an external device associated with the second stroke and the intermediate time amount.

在一些实施例中,第一笔画具有特性动力学,并且发送表示第一笔画的数据包括:向外部设备发送指示特性动力学的数据。In some embodiments, the first stroke has characteristic dynamics, and sending data representing the first stroke includes sending data indicative of the characteristic dynamics to an external device.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为在已经接收第一笔画第二预定持续时间之后(例如,利用淡出使能单元1418)使能第一笔画的所显示的可视表示的淡出。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1406 is further configured to enable fading of the displayed visual representation of the first stroke (eg, using the fade enabling unit 1418 ) after the first stroke has been received for a second predetermined duration.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以:显示接收到数据的指示,并且显示可供件,其中当选择可供件时,使得外部设备显示第一笔画的可视表示。In some embodiments, sending the data triggers the external device to: display an indication that the data was received, and display an affordance, wherein the affordance, when selected, causes the external device to display a visual representation of the first stroke.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以显示第一笔画的可视表示。In some embodiments, sending the data triggers the external device to display a visual representation of the first stroke.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以显示第一笔画的可视表示,接着中间时间量的暂停,并且然后显示第二笔画的可视表示。In some embodiments, sending data triggers the external device to display a visual representation of a first stroke, followed by a pause of an intervening amount of time, and then display a visual representation of a second stroke.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以显示具有特性动力学的第一笔画的可视表示。In some embodiments, sending the data triggers the external device to display a visual representation of the first stroke having the characteristic dynamics.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:在确定已经显示可视表示第三预定持续时间之后(例如,利用淡出使能单元1418)使能笔画的可视表示的淡出。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1406 is further configured to enable fading of the visual representation of the stroke (eg, using the fade enabling unit 1418 ) after determining that the visual representation has been displayed for the third predetermined duration.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:从外部设备(例如,利用接收单元1402)接收数据,数据表示由外部设备检测的第三触摸输入,第三触摸输出表示第三笔画;并且在电子设备的绘图区域(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能第三笔画的可视表示的显示。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1406 is further configured to: receive data from an external device (e.g., using the receiving unit 1402), the data representing a third touch input detected by the external device, the third touch output representing a third stroke; and enable display of a visual representation of the third stroke in a drawing area of the electronic device (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1410).

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:在第四预定持续时间之后,(利用淡出使能单元1418)使能第三笔画的可视表示的淡出。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1406 is further configured to enable fading of the visual representation of the third stroke (using the fade enabling unit 1418 ) after a fourth predetermined duration.

在一些实施例中,第二预定持续时间、第三预定持续时间以及第四预定持续时间是相同的持续时间。In some embodiments, the second predetermined duration, the third predetermined duration, and the fourth predetermined duration are the same duration.

在一些实施例中,笔画具有开始和结束,并且淡出笔画的可视表示包括:在淡出可视表示的对应的结束之前,淡出可视表示的对应的开始。In some embodiments, the stroke has a beginning and an end, and fading out the visual representation of the stroke comprises fading out the corresponding beginning of the visual representation before fading out the corresponding end of the visual representation.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能绘图区域中的颜色拾取器的可供件的显示,其中颜色拾取器可供件具有指示当前所选的颜色的颜色,其中显示第一笔画的可供件包括:以当前所选的颜色显示可视表示;并且响应于检测到颜色拾取器可供件的选择,(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能表示颜色的多个颜色可供件的显示。In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 is further configured to: enable display of a color picker affordance in the drawing area (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410), wherein the color picker affordance has a color indicative of a currently selected color, wherein displaying the affordance for the first stroke comprises: displaying a visual representation in the currently selected color; and in response to detecting selection of the color picker affordance, enable display of multiple color affordances representing colors (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410).

在一些实施例中,多个颜色可供件包括表示之前所选的颜色的多个颜色可供件。In some embodiments, the plurality of color affordances includes a plurality of color affordances representing previously selected colors.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:响应于检测到所显示的多个颜色可供件的颜色可供件的选择,(例如,利用显示使能单元)使能调色板的显示。In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 is further configured to: in response to detecting selection of a color affordance of the displayed plurality of color affordances, enable display of the color palette (eg, using a display enabling unit).

在一些实施例中,调色板包括具有不同颜色的多个部分,并且处理单元1406被进一步配置为:响应于检测到对应于所选的颜色的调色板的一部分的选择:(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能绘图区域的显示;并且(例如,利用更新使能单元1422)使能绘图区域中所显示的颜色拾取器可供件的更新,以使得利用所选的颜色来更新颜色拾取器可供件。In some embodiments, the color palette includes multiple portions having different colors, and processing unit 1406 is further configured to: in response to detecting selection of a portion of the color palette corresponding to a selected color: enable display of the drawing area (e.g., using display enable unit 1410); and enable updating of a color picker affordance displayed in the drawing area (e.g., using update enable unit 1422) so that the color picker affordance is updated with the selected color.

在一些实施例中,向外部设备发送表示第一笔画的数据包括:发送表示所选的颜色的数据。In some embodiments, sending data representing the first stroke to the external device includes sending data representing a selected color.

在一些实施例中,电子设备包括可旋转输入机构,并且处理单元1406被进一步配置为:当使能表示联系人的多个可供件的显示时,(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测表示可旋转输入机构的移动的用户输入;并且响应于检测到的用户输入:(例如,利用缩放使能单元1424)使能多个用户指定的联系人的显示的缩放,其中缩放显示包括改变正在被显示的联系人的大小。In some embodiments, the electronic device includes a rotatable input mechanism, and the processing unit 1406 is further configured to: when enabling display of multiple affordances representing contacts, detect (e.g., using the detection unit 1408) user input representing movement of the rotatable input mechanism; and in response to the detected user input: enable scaling of the display of multiple user-specified contacts (e.g., using the scaling enabling unit 1424), wherein the scaling display includes changing the size of the contacts being displayed.

在一些实施例中,使能显示的缩放包括:使能正在被显示的联系人的数目的变化。In some embodiments, enabling scaling of the display includes enabling a change in the number of contacts being displayed.

在一些实施例中,触敏显示器包括用于检测触敏显示器上的触摸的强度的一个或者多个传感器,并且处理单元1406被进一步配置为:当使能绘图区域的显示时,(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测触敏显示器上的触摸,其中触摸具有特性强度;(例如,利用确定单元1416)确定特性强度是否超过预定阈值强度;响应于确定特性强度超过预定阈值强度:(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能呼叫可供件的显示,其中当呼叫可供件被选择时,使得处理单元发起对与联系人相关联的外部设备的呼叫;并且响应于确定特性强度没有超过预定阈值强度,(例如,利用发送单元1414)向外部设备发送表示触摸的数据。In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive display includes one or more sensors for detecting the intensity of a touch on the touch-sensitive display, and the processing unit 1406 is further configured to: when enabling display of the drawing area, detect a touch on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., using the detection unit 1408), wherein the touch has a characteristic intensity; determine (e.g., using the determination unit 1416) whether the characteristic intensity exceeds a predetermined threshold intensity; in response to determining that the characteristic intensity exceeds the predetermined threshold intensity: enable display of a call offering (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1410), wherein when the call offering is selected, cause the processing unit to initiate a call to an external device associated with the contact; and in response to determining that the characteristic intensity does not exceed the predetermined threshold intensity, send data representing the touch to the external device (e.g., using the sending unit 1414).

在一些实施例中,触敏显示器包括用于检测触敏显示器上的触摸的强度的一个或者多个传感器,并且处理单元1406被进一步配置为:当使能绘图区域的显示时,(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测触敏显示器上的触摸,其中触摸具有特性强度;(例如,利用确定单元1416)确定特性强度是否超过预定阈值强度;响应于确定特性强度超过预定阈值强度:(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能文本可供件的显示,其中当文本可供件被选择时,使得处理单元发起针对与联系人相关联的外部设备的消息;并且响应于确定特性强度没有超过预定阈值强度,(例如,利用发送单元1414)向外部设备发送表示触摸的数据。In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive display includes one or more sensors for detecting the intensity of a touch on the touch-sensitive display, and the processing unit 1406 is further configured to: when enabling display of the drawing area, detect a touch on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., using the detection unit 1408), wherein the touch has a characteristic intensity; determine (e.g., using the determination unit 1416) whether the characteristic intensity exceeds a predetermined threshold intensity; in response to determining that the characteristic intensity exceeds the predetermined threshold intensity: enable display of a text affordance (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1410), wherein when the text affordance is selected, cause the processing unit to initiate a message to an external device associated with the contact; and in response to determining that the characteristic intensity does not exceed the predetermined threshold intensity, send data representing the touch to the external device (e.g., using the sending unit 1414).

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:当使能标识所选的联系人的联系人信息的显示时,(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能呼叫可供件的显示,其中当呼叫可供件被选择时,使得处理单元1406发起对与所选的联系人相关联的外部设备的呼叫。In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 is further configured to: when display of contact information identifying a selected contact is enabled, enable display of a call affordance (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410), wherein when the call affordance is selected, cause processing unit 1406 to initiate a call to an external device associated with the selected contact.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1406被进一步配置为:当使能标识所选的联系人的联系人信息的显示时,(例如,利用显示使能单元1410)使能文本可供件的显示,其中当文本可供件被选择时,使得处理单元1406发起针对与所选的联系人相关联的外部设备的消息。In some embodiments, processing unit 1406 is further configured to: when display of contact information identifying a selected contact is enabled, enable display of a text affordance (e.g., using display enabling unit 1410), wherein when the text affordance is selected, cause processing unit 1406 to initiate a message to an external device associated with the selected contact.

在一些实施例中,使能表示联系人的多个可供件的显示包括:使能表示用户指定的联系人的多个可供件的显示,用户指定的联系人是对电子设备可访问的联系人的子集。In some embodiments, enabling display of a plurality of affordances representing contacts includes enabling display of a plurality of affordances representing user-specified contacts, the user-specified contacts being a subset of contacts accessible to the electronic device.

在一些实施例中,电子设备包括与触敏显示器分离的可按压的输入机构,并且检测用户输入包括:检测可按压输入机构的激活。In some embodiments, the electronic device includes a depressible input mechanism separate from the touch-sensitive display, and detecting the user input includes detecting activation of the depressible input mechanism.

在一些实施例中,电子设备包括可按压输入机构和麦克风,处理单元被进一步配置为:当使能绘图区域的显示时,(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测可按压的输入机构的激活的显示;响应于检测到激活:在可按压输入机构保持按压时,基于从麦克风接收的输入来(例如,利用记录单元1426)记录音频消息;(例如,利用检测单元1408)检测可按压输入机构的释放;并且响应于检测到释放:(例如,利用停止单元1428)停止记录音频消息,并且向与所选的联系人相关联的外部设备发送所记录的音频消息。In some embodiments, the electronic device includes a pressable input mechanism and a microphone, and the processing unit is further configured to: when display of the drawing area is enabled, detect the activated display of the pressable input mechanism (for example, using detection unit 1408); in response to detecting the activation: while the pressable input mechanism remains pressed, record an audio message based on the input received from the microphone (for example, using recording unit 1426); detect the release of the pressable input mechanism (for example, using detection unit 1408); and in response to detecting the release: stop recording the audio message (for example, using stop unit 1428) and send the recorded audio message to an external device associated with the selected contact.

以上参考图10A-10C所描述的操作可选地由图1A-1B或者图14中所描绘的部件实现。例如,显示操作1002和1018、检测操作1004、1006和1008、确定操作1010、1014和1020、发送操作1012、1016和1022以及可选的接收操作1024可选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180以及事件处理机190实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171在触敏表面显示器112上检测接触,并且事件分派器模块174向应用136-1递送事件信息。应用136-1的相应事件识别器180比较事件信息与相应事件定义186,并且确定在触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或者子事件,诸如,用户界面上的对象的选择、从一个方向到另一方向的设备的旋转。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或者子事件时,事件识别器180激活与事件或者子事件的检测相关联的事件处理机190。事件处理机190可以利用或调用数据更新器176或者对象更新器177以更新应用内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理机190访问相应的GUI更新器178以更新由应用显示的内容。类似地,对于本领域技术人员来说,如何基于图1A-1B所描绘的部件来实现其他过程将是清楚的。The operations described above with reference to Figures 10A-10C may optionally be implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 14. For example, display operations 1002 and 1018, detection operations 1004, 1006, and 1008, determination operations 1010, 1014, and 1020, sending operations 1012, 1016, and 1022, and optional receiving operation 1024 may optionally be implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contacts on touch-sensitive surface display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface or rotation of a device from one direction to another. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 may utilize or call data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, it will be clear to those skilled in the art how to implement other processes based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

根据一些实施例,图15示出了根据各个描述的实施例的原理配置的电子设备1500的功能块图。设备的功能块可选地由硬件、软件或者硬件和软件的组合实现,以执行各个描述的实施例原理。本领域技术人员应当理解,图15中所描述的功能块可选地被组合或者被分离成子块以实现各个描述的实施例原理。因此,本文的描述可选地支持本文所描述的功能块的任何可能的组合或者分离或者更一步的定义。According to some embodiments, Figure 15 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1500 configured according to the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to perform the principles of the various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional blocks described in Figure 15 are optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

如图15所示出的,电子设备1500包括被配置为显示图形用户界面的显示单元1502、被配置为接收接触的触敏表面单元1504、以及耦合到显示单元1502和触敏表面单元1504的处理单元1506。在一些实施例中,处理单元1506包括接收单元1508、检测单元1510、确定单元1512以及发送单元1514。电子设备可选地被配置为与关联于联系人的外部设备进行通信。15 , electronic device 1500 includes a display unit 1502 configured to display a graphical user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 configured to receive contacts, and a processing unit 1506 coupled to display unit 1502 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1504. In some embodiments, processing unit 1506 includes a receiving unit 1508, a detecting unit 1510, a determining unit 1512, and a sending unit 1514. The electronic device is optionally configured to communicate with an external device associated with the contact.

处理单元1506被配置为:(例如,利用接收单元1508)接收表示联系人的所显示的可供件的用户选择;在接收该选择之后,(例如,利用检测单元1510)检测触敏显示器上的用户输入;(例如,利用确定单元1512)确定触摸输入是单指触摸输入还是多指触摸输入;并且根据触摸是单指触摸输入的确定,(例如,利用发送单元1514)向外部设备发送数据,该数据表示单指触摸输入。Processing unit 1506 is configured to: receive a user selection of a displayed affordance representing a contact (e.g., using receiving unit 1508); after receiving the selection, detect user input on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., using detecting unit 1510); determine (e.g., using determining unit 1512) whether the touch input is a single-finger touch input or a multi-finger touch input; and based on the determination that the touch is a single-finger touch input, send data to an external device (e.g., using sending unit 1514), the data representing the single-finger touch input.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以提供对应于单指触摸输入的输出。In some embodiments, sending data triggers the external device to provide output corresponding to the single-finger touch input.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以显示接收到数据的通知,并且当可供件被选择时,使得外部设备显示单指触摸输入的可视表示。In some embodiments, sending the data triggers the external device to display a notification that the data was received and, when the affordance is selected, causes the external device to display a visual representation of the single-finger touch input.

在一些实施例中,在电子设备的触敏显示器上检测用户输入包括:在触敏显示器的位置处检测单指触摸输入,并且当显示单指触摸输入的可视表示时,在外部设备的显示屏上的对应于检测到单指触摸输入的位置的位置处显示单指触摸输入的可视表示。In some embodiments, detecting user input on a touch-sensitive display of an electronic device includes detecting a single-finger touch input at a location on the touch-sensitive display, and when displaying a visual representation of the single-finger touch input, displaying a visual representation of the single-finger touch input at a location on a display screen of an external device corresponding to the location where the single-finger touch input was detected.

在一些实施例中,可视指示包括一个或者多个圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。In some embodiments, the visual indication comprises one or more circles, ellipses, and/or ovals.

在一些实施例中,可视指示包括两个或者更多个同中心的圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。In some embodiments, the visual indication comprises two or more concentric circles, ellipses, and/or ovals.

在一些实施例中,在显示可视指示预定时间量之后,外部设备上的可视指示淡出。In some embodiments, after displaying the visual indication for a predetermined amount of time, the visual indication on the external device fades out.

在一些实施例中,单指触摸是单指叩击。In some embodiments, the single-finger touch is a single-finger tap.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1506被进一步配置为:根据检测到的用户输入表示多指触摸输入的确定,(例如,利用发送单元1514)向外部设备发送数据,其中发送数据触发外部设备以持续地显示多指触摸输入的可视指示。In some embodiments, processing unit 1506 is further configured to: based on the determination that the detected user input represents a multi-touch input, send data to an external device (for example, using sending unit 1514), wherein sending the data triggers the external device to continuously display a visual indication of the multi-touch input.

在一些实施例中,输出包括接收到数据的通知,并且当选择可供件时,使得处理单元使能多指触摸输入的可视指示符的持续地显示。In some embodiments, the output includes a notification that the data was received and, when the affordance is selected, causes the processing unit to enable persistent display of a visual indicator of the multi-touch input.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符是图像。In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an image.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符是动画图像。In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an animated image.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符是搏动的心跳的动画图像。In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an animated image of a beating heartbeat.

在一些实施例中,电子设备进一步包括被配置为检测心跳的速率的生物传感器,其中搏动的心跳的搏动的速率基于检测到的心跳的速率。In some embodiments, the electronic device further comprises a biosensor configured to detect a rate of a heartbeat, wherein the rate of the beats of the pulsating heartbeat is based on the detected rate of the heartbeat.

在一些实施例中,电子设备进一步包括被配置为检测心跳的速率的生物传感器,其中发送数据触发外部设备以提供对应于检测到的心跳的速率的触觉输出。In some embodiments, the electronic device further includes a biosensor configured to detect a rate of heartbeat, wherein sending the data triggers the external device to provide a tactile output corresponding to the detected rate of heartbeat.

在一些实施例中,发送数据触发外部设备以提供触觉输出。In some embodiments, sending data triggers an external device to provide tactile output.

在一些实施例中,电子设备包括可旋转输入机构,其中接收接触的用户选择包括:使能表示联系人的多个可供件的显示;检测表示可旋转输入机构的移动的用户输入;并且响应于检测到用户输入:使能多个用户指定的联系人的显示,其中缩放显示包括改变正被显示的联系人的大小。In some embodiments, the electronic device includes a rotatable input mechanism, wherein receiving a user selection of a contact includes: enabling display of multiple affordances representing contacts; detecting user input representing movement of the rotatable input mechanism; and in response to detecting the user input: enabling display of multiple user-specified contacts, wherein scaling the display includes changing the size of the contacts being displayed.

在一些实施例中,使能显示的缩放包括使能正被显示的联系人的数目的变化。In some embodiments, enabling scaling of the display includes enabling a change in the number of contacts being displayed.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1506被进一步配置为:当使能表示联系人的多个可供件的显示时,(例如,利用检测单元1510)检测所显示的可供件上的用户输入;并且响应于检测到触摸输入,(例如,利用发送单元1514)向与联系人相关联的外部设备发送数据,其中发送数据触发外部设备以提供触觉输出。In some embodiments, processing unit 1506 is further configured to: when display of multiple affordances representing contacts is enabled, detect user input on the displayed affordances (e.g., using detection unit 1510); and in response to detecting touch input, send data to an external device associated with the contact (e.g., using sending unit 1514), wherein sending the data triggers the external device to provide tactile output.

在一些实施例中,检测所显示的可供件上的触摸输入包括:检测第一触摸并且在预定持续时间内释放所显示的可供件,然后检测第二触摸并且在预定持续时间内释放所显示的可供件。In some embodiments, detecting touch input on the displayed affordance includes detecting a first touch and releasing the displayed affordance within a predetermined duration, and then detecting a second touch and releasing the displayed affordance within a predetermined duration.

以上参考图10A-10C所描述的操作可选地由图1A-1B或者图15中所描绘的部件实现。例如,显示操作1002和1018、检测操作1004、1006和1008、确定操作1010、1014和1020、发送操作1012、1016和1022以及可选的接收操作1024可选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180以及事件处理机190实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171在触敏表面显示器112上检测接触,并且事件分派器模块174向应用136-1递送事件信息。应用136-1的相应事件识别器180比较事件信息与相应事件定义186,并且确定在触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触(或者设备是否旋转)是否对应于预定义的事件或者子事件,诸如,对用户界面上的对象的选择、从一个方向到另一方向的设备的旋转。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或者子事件时,事件识别器180激活与事件或者子事件的检测相关联的事件处理机190。事件处理机190可以利用或调用数据更新器176或者对象更新器177以更新应用内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理机190访问相应的GUI更新器178以更新由应用显示的内容。类似地,对于本领域技术人员来说,如何基于图1A-1B所描绘的部件来实现其他过程将是清楚的。The operations described above with reference to Figures 10A-10C may optionally be implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 15. For example, display operations 1002 and 1018, detection operations 1004, 1006, and 1008, determination operations 1010, 1014, and 1020, sending operations 1012, 1016, and 1022, and optional receiving operation 1024 may optionally be implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contact on touch-sensitive surface display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether the device is rotated) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on the user interface or rotation of the device from one direction to another. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 may utilize or call data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, it will be clear to those skilled in the art how to implement other processes based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

根据一些实施例,图16示出了根据各个描述的实施例的原理配置的电子设备1600的功能块图。设备的功能块可选地由硬件、软件或者硬件和软件的组合实现,以执行各个描述的实施例原理。本领域技术人员应当理解,图16中所描述的功能块可选地被组合或者被分离成子块以实现各个描述的实施例原理。因此,本文的描述可选地支持本文所描述的功能块的任何可能的组合或者分离或者更一步的定义。According to some embodiments, Figure 16 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1600 configured according to the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to perform the principles of the various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional blocks described in Figure 16 are optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

如图16所示出的,电子设备1600包括被配置显示图形用户界面的显示单元1602、被配置为接收接触的触敏表面单元1604、以及耦合到显示单元1602和触敏表面单元1604的处理单元1606。在一些实施例中,处理单元1606包括接收单元1608、发出单元1610、检测单元1612、确定单元1614、显示使能单元1616、替换单元1618、播放单元1620以及标识单元1622。电子设备可选地被配置为与外部设备进行通信。16 , electronic device 1600 includes a display unit 1602 configured to display a graphical user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1604 configured to receive contacts, and a processing unit 1606 coupled to display unit 1602 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1604. In some embodiments, processing unit 1606 includes a receiving unit 1608, an issuing unit 1610, a detecting unit 1612, a determining unit 1614, a display enabling unit 1616, a replacing unit 1618, a playing unit 1620, and an identifying unit 1622. The electronic device may optionally be configured to communicate with an external device.

处理单元1606被配置为:(例如,利用接收单元1608)接收对应于由外部设备检测的输入的数据;响应于接收到该数据,(例如,利用发出单元1610)发出触觉输出;在发出触觉输出之后,(例如,利用检测单元1612)检测用户输入;(例如,利用确定单元1614)确定在触觉输出之后的预定时间间隔内是否检测到用户输入;并且根据在预定时间间隔内检测到用户输入的确定,在显示器上(例如,利用显示使能单元1616)使能通知的显示,其中该通知指示用于回放的信息的可用性。Processing unit 1606 is configured to: receive data corresponding to input detected by an external device (e.g., using receiving unit 1608); in response to receiving the data, emit a tactile output (e.g., using emitting unit 1610); after issuing the tactile output, detect user input (e.g., using detecting unit 1612); determine (e.g., using determining unit 1614) whether user input is detected within a predetermined time interval after the tactile output; and based on a determination that user input is detected within the predetermined time interval, enable display of a notification on the display (e.g., using display enabling unit 1616), wherein the notification indicates the availability of information for playback.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:在使能停止的显示时,(例如,利用检测单元1612)检测第二用户输入;(例如,利用确定单元1614)确定接收到的数据是否包括可视信息;并且根据接收到的数据包括可视信息的确定:利用可视信息(例如,利用替换单元1618)替换所显示的通知。In some embodiments, processing unit 1606 is further configured to: when enabling the stopped display, detect a second user input (e.g., using detection unit 1612); determine (e.g., using determination unit 1614) whether the received data includes visual information; and based on the determination that the received data includes visual information: replace the displayed notification with the visual information (e.g., using replacement unit 1618).

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:(例如,利用确定单元1614)确定接收到的数据是否包括音频信息;并且根据接收到的数据包括音频信息的确定:通过操作地连接到电子设备的扬声器(例如,利用播放单元1620)播放音频信息。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: determine (e.g., using the determination unit 1614) whether the received data includes audio information; and based on the determination that the received data includes audio information: play the audio information through a speaker operatively connected to the electronic device (e.g., using the playback unit 1620).

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:(例如,利用标识单元1622)标识与外部设备相关联的用户;并且根据在预定时间间隔之后检测到用户输入的确定:(例如,利用显示使能单元1616)使能表示用户指定的联系人的多个可供件的显示,并且可供件表示与外部设备相关联的用户;并且(例如,利用显示使能单元1616)使能对应于表示与外部设备相关联的用户的可供件的指示符的显示,指示符指示从与外部设备相关联的用户接收到的用于回放的信息的可用性。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: identify a user associated with the external device (e.g., using the identification unit 1622); and based on a determination that user input is detected after a predetermined time interval: enable display of multiple affordances representing user-specified contacts (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1616), and the affordances represent the user associated with the external device; and enable display of an indicator corresponding to the affordance representing the user associated with the external device (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1616), the indicator indicating the availability of information received from the user associated with the external device for playback.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:(例如,利用标识单元1622)标识对电子设备可访问的多个联系人;(例如,利用确定单元1614)确定外部设备是否与对电子设备可访问的多个联系人中的联系人相关联;根据外部设备与对电子设备可访问的多个联系人中的联系人不相关联的确定:(例如,利用显示使能单元1616)使能添加联系人可供件的显示,其中当添加联系人可供件被选择时,使得处理单元使能用于注册联系人并且将设备与联系人相关联的用户界面屏幕的显示。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: (e.g., using the identification unit 1622) identify multiple contacts accessible to the electronic device; (e.g., using the determination unit 1614) determine whether the external device is associated with a contact among the multiple contacts accessible to the electronic device; based on the determination that the external device is not associated with a contact among the multiple contacts accessible to the electronic device: (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1616) enable display of an add contact affordance, wherein when the add contact affordance is selected, the processing unit enables display of a user interface screen for registering contacts and associating the device with the contacts.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:(例如,利用标识单元1622)将对电子设备可访问的多个联系人的子集标识为多个用户指定的联系人;(例如,利用确定单元1614)确定外部设备是否与多个用户指定的联系人中的用户指定的联系人相关联;并且根据外部设备与对电子设备可访问的多个联系人中的联系人相关联、但是与多个用户指定的联系人中的用户指定的联系人不相关联的确定:(例如,利用显示使能单元1616)使能指定可供件的显示,其中当指定可供件被选择时,使得处理单元使能用于将与外部设备相关联的联系人指定为用户指定的联系人的用户界面屏幕的显示。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: (e.g., using the identification unit 1622) identify a subset of multiple contacts accessible to the electronic device as multiple user-specified contacts; (e.g., using the determination unit 1614) determine whether the external device is associated with a user-specified contact among the multiple user-specified contacts; and based on the determination that the external device is associated with a contact among the multiple contacts accessible to the electronic device but is not associated with a user-specified contact among the multiple user-specified contacts: (e.g., using the display enabling unit 1616) enable display of a designated affordance, wherein when the designated affordance is selected, the processing unit enables display of a user interface screen for designating a contact associated with the external device as a user-specified contact.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:(例如,利用标识单元1622)标识与外部设备相关联的联系人姓名,其中在显示器上使能通知的显示包括使能联系人姓名的标识的显示。In some embodiments, processing unit 1606 is further configured to: identify a contact name associated with the external device (eg, using identification unit 1622 ), wherein enabling display of the notification on the display includes enabling display of the identification of the contact name.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1606被进一步配置为:(例如,利用标识单元1622)标识与联系人姓名相关联的图像,其中在显示器上使能通知的显示包括使能图像的显示。In some embodiments, processing unit 1606 is further configured to: identify (eg, using identification unit 1622) an image associated with the contact name, wherein enabling display of the notification on the display includes enabling display of the image.

在一些实施例中,检测用户输入包括检测电子设备的移动。In some embodiments, detecting user input includes detecting movement of the electronic device.

在一些实施例中,检测用户输入包括检测电子设备的抬起。In some embodiments, detecting user input includes detecting lifting of the electronic device.

以上参考图11所描述的操作可选地由图1A-1B或者图16中所描绘的部件实现。例如,接收操作1101和1110、检测操作1104、确定操作1006、显示操作1008和1114以及返回操作1112可选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180以及事件处理机190实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171在触敏表面显示器112上检测接触,并且事件分派器模块174向应用136-1递送事件信息。应用136-1的相应事件识别器180比较事件信息与相应事件定义186,并且确定在触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触(或者设备是否旋转)是否对应于预定义的事件或者子事件,诸如,对用户界面上的对象的选择、从一个方向到另一方向的设备的旋转。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或者子事件时,事件识别器180激活与事件或者子事件的检测相关联的事件处理机190。事件处理机190可以利用或调用数据更新器176或者对象更新器177以更新应用内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理机190访问相应的GUI更新器178以更新由应用显示的内容。类似地,对于本领域技术人员来说,如何基于图1A-1B所描绘的部件来实现其他过程将是清楚的。The operations described above with reference to FIG11 may optionally be implemented by the components depicted in FIG1A-1B or FIG16. For example, receiving operations 1101 and 1110, detecting operation 1104, determining operation 1006, displaying operations 1008 and 1114, and returning operation 1112 may optionally be implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contact on touch-sensitive surface display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether the device is rotated) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on the user interface or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. Upon detecting the corresponding predefined event or sub-event, event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 can utilize or call data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, it will be clear to those skilled in the art how to implement other processes based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

根据一些实施例,图17示出了根据各个描述的实施例的原理配置的电子设备1700的功能块图。设备的功能块可选地由硬件、软件或者硬件和软件的组合实现,以执行各个描述的实施例原理。本领域技术人员应当理解,图17中所描述的功能块可选地被组合或者被分离成子块以实现各个描述的实施例原理。因此,本文的描述可选地支持本文所描述的功能块的任何可能的组合或者分离或者更一步的定义。According to some embodiments, Figure 17 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1700 configured according to the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to perform the principles of the various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional blocks described in Figure 17 are optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

如图17所示,电子设备1700包括配置为显示图形用户界面的显示单元1702、配置为接收触摸的触敏表面单元1704、以及耦合到显示单元1702和触敏表面单元1704的处理单元1706。在一些实施例中,处理单元1706包括接收单元1708、确定单元1710、回放单元1712、显示使能单元1714、提供单元1716和淡出使能单元1718。电子设备可选地配置为与外部设备通信。17 , electronic device 1700 includes a display unit 1702 configured to display a graphical user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1704 configured to receive touches, and a processing unit 1706 coupled to display unit 1702 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1704. In some embodiments, processing unit 1706 includes a receiving unit 1708, a determining unit 1710, a playback unit 1712, a display enabling unit 1714, a providing unit 1716, and a fade enabling unit 1718. The electronic device may optionally be configured to communicate with an external device.

处理单元1706配置为接收(例如用接收单元1708)来自表示外部设备处接收的用户输入的外部设备的数据;确定(例如用确定单元1710)电子设备是否在活跃地执行回放应用;根据确定了电子设备在活跃地执行回放应用,回放(例如用回放单元1712)接收的数据;以及根据确定了电子设备没有在活跃地执行回放应用:使得能够显示(例如用显示使能单元1714)数据接收的指示;以及使得能够显示(例如用显示使能单元1714)可供件,其中可供件当被选择时发起回放应用并且使得电子设备回放接收的数据。Processing unit 1706 is configured to receive (e.g., with receiving unit 1708) data from an external device representing user input received at the external device; determine (e.g., with determining unit 1710) whether the electronic device is actively executing a playback application; based on determining that the electronic device is actively executing the playback application, play back (e.g., with playback unit 1712) the received data; and based on determining that the electronic device is not actively executing the playback application: enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1714) an indication that data is received; and enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1714) an affordance, wherein the affordance, when selected, initiates the playback application and causes the electronic device to play back the received data.

在一些实施例中,处理单元还配置为根据确定了电子设备没有在活跃地执行回放应用,响应于接收数据提供(例如用提供单元1716)触觉输出。In some embodiments, the processing unit is further configured to provide (eg, with providing unit 1716 ) a tactile output in response to receiving the data based on determining that the electronic device is not actively executing the playback application.

在一些实施例中,回放接收的数据还包括,根据确定了用户输入是外部设备上的单指触摸输入,使得能够在电子设备的屏幕上对应于单指触摸输入被检测的外部设备上的位置显示单指触摸输入的视觉表示。In some embodiments, playing back the received data also includes, based on determining that the user input is a single-finger touch input on the external device, enabling display of a visual representation of the single-finger touch input on the screen of the electronic device corresponding to a location on the external device where the single-finger touch input is detected.

在一些实施例中,视觉指示包括一个或多个圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。In some embodiments, the visual indication comprises one or more circles, ellipses, and/or ovals.

在一些实施例中,视觉指示包括两个或多个同心的圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。In some embodiments, the visual indication comprises two or more concentric circles, ellipses, and/or ovals.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1706还配置为使得能够在预定时间量之后淡出(例如用淡出使能单元1718)视觉指示。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1706 is further configured to enable fading out (eg, with the fade-out enabling unit 1718) of the visual indication after a predetermined amount of time.

在一些实施例中,回放接收的数据还包括:根据确定了用户输入是外部设备上的多指触摸输入,使得能够显示针对多指触摸输入的持续的可视指示符。In some embodiments, playing back the received data further comprises: enabling display of a persistent visual indicator for the multi-touch input based on determining that the user input is a multi-touch input on the external device.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符是图像。In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an image.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符是动画图像。In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an animated image.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符是搏动的心脏的动画图像。In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an animated image of a beating heart.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1706还配置为:在使得能够显示可视指示符的同时,提供(例如用提供单元1716)触觉输出。In some embodiments, processing unit 1706 is further configured to provide (eg, with providing unit 1716 ) a tactile output while enabling display of the visual indicator.

在一些实施例中,回放接收的数据还包括:根据确定了用户输入是外部设备上的双叩击,使得能够显示与外部设备相关联的用户的标识,并且在显示标识的同时提供触觉输出。In some embodiments, playing back the received data further comprises: based on determining that the user input is a double tap on the external device, enabling display of an identification of a user associated with the external device and providing a tactile output while displaying the identification.

在一些实施例中,回放接收的数据还包括:根据确定了用户输入是使用外部设备的麦克风记录的音频记录,播放音频记录。In some embodiments, playing back the received data further comprises: playing the audio recording based on determining that the user input is an audio recording recorded using a microphone of the external device.

在一些实施例中,回放接收的数据还包括:根据确定了用户输入是外部设备上表示笔画(stroke)的轻扫接触(contact),使得能够显示笔画的视觉表示。In some embodiments, playing back the received data further comprises: upon determining that the user input is a swipe contact on the external device representing a stroke, enabling display of a visual representation of the stroke.

在一些实施例中,处理单元1706还配置为使得能够在预定持续时间之后淡出笔画。In some embodiments, the processing unit 1706 is further configured to enable fading out of the stroke after a predetermined duration.

上面关于图12描述的操作可选地由图1A-1B和图17中描绘的部件来实施。例如,接收操作1202和1210、确定操作1204和显示操作1206和1208可选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180和事件处理机190来实施。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171检测触敏显示器112上的接触,事件分派器模块174将事件信息递送到应用136-1。应用136-1的相应的事件识别器180将事件信息与相应的事件定义186比较,并且确定触敏表面(或者设备的旋转)上第一位置处的第一接触对应于预定义的事件或子事件,诸如在用户界面上选择对象、或者旋转设备从一个定向到另一定向。当相应的预定义事件或子事件被检测时,事件识别器180激活与事件或子事件检测相关联的事件处理机190。事件处理机190可选地使用或调用数据更新器176或对象更新器177以更新应用外部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理机190访问相应的GUI更新器178以更新由应用来显示什么。相似地,本领域普通技术人员应清楚的是其它过程可以怎样基于图1A-1B中描绘的部件来实施。The operations described above with respect to FIG. 12 may optionally be implemented by the components depicted in FIG. 1A-1B and FIG. 17 . For example, receiving operations 1202 and 1210 , determining operation 1204 , and displaying operations 1206 and 1208 may optionally be implemented by event classifier 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 . An event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112 , and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136 - 1 . The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136 - 1 compares the event information with a corresponding event definition 186 and determines that a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selecting an object on a user interface or rotating the device from one orientation to another. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the event or sub-event detection. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application external state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses the corresponding GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it should be clear to one of ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

图18A-18B图示包括电子设备1800处的用户界面1802的触敏显示器的示例实施例。用户界面1802和下面描述的方法允许用户与其信息存储在电子设备1800上的一个或多个联系人通信。在一些实施例中,用户可能已经在电子设备1800上存储大量的联系人并且因此需要有效的方法用于标识和与特定联系人通信。而且,在一些情况下,用户可能经常地仅占用所存储的联系人的子集。如此,每次用户期望与特定联系人通信时,将不方便滚动通过联系人列表。因此,为了增强用户体验并且改善有效的通信,可能期望对于电子设备1800来显示包括由用户选择的有限数量的一个或多个联系人的用户界面。Figures 18A-18B illustrate an example embodiment of a touch-sensitive display including a user interface 1802 at an electronic device 1800. The user interface 1802 and the methods described below allow a user to communicate with one or more contacts whose information is stored on the electronic device 1800. In some embodiments, the user may have stored a large number of contacts on the electronic device 1800 and therefore require an efficient method for identifying and communicating with a particular contact. Moreover, in some cases, the user may frequently only access a subset of the stored contacts. In this way, it would be inconvenient to scroll through the contact list each time the user desires to communicate with a particular contact. Therefore, in order to enhance the user experience and improve efficient communication, it may be desirable for the electronic device 1800 to display a user interface that includes a limited number of one or more contacts selected by the user.

电子设备1800可以与便携式多功能设备100和/或设备500相同或相似。而且,电子设备1800可以包括可旋转输入机构1820,其可以与可旋转输入机构506相同或相似。电子设备1800可以包括触敏显示器,其可以包括用户界面1802,并且可以与触敏显示器系统112和/或显示器504相同或相似。Electronic device 1800 can be the same as or similar to portable multifunction device 100 and/or device 500. Furthermore, electronic device 1800 can include a rotatable input mechanism 1820, which can be the same as or similar to rotatable input mechanism 506. Electronic device 1800 can include a touch-sensitive display, which can include a user interface 1802 and can be the same as or similar to touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or display 504.

如图18A图示,电子设备1800可以配置为在包括用户界面1802的触敏显示器上显示布置或以其它方式定位在可供件1804周围的多个对象(例如第一对象1808、第二对象1810、第三对象1812和对象1840a-1840i)。在一些实施例中,多个对象的一个或多个对象可以与多个联系人的一个联系人相关联。例如,第一对象1808可以与联系人Steve Jones相关联。相应地,第一对象1808可以包括首字母的集合(例如SJ),其可以显示在第一对象1808内。在一些实施例中,首字母的几何可以是文织字母(monogram),诸如但不限于风格化的(stylized)、内部交织(inter-woven)或交叠的首字母。相似地,第二对象1810可以包括首字母“AS”,并且第三对象1812可以包括首字母“IS”。在一些实施例中,用户界面可以包括12个对象,每个布置在对应于标准时钟或表盘中的小时的位置中(例如一小时处、两小时处、三小时处的对象等等)。在其它实施例中,可以有6个对象布置在对应于标准时钟中每两个小时的位置处,或者24个对象对应于每30分钟的位置处。As shown in Figure 18A, electronic device 1800 can be configured to display multiple objects (e.g., first object 1808, second object 1810, third object 1812, and objects 1840a-1840i) arranged or otherwise positioned around affordance 1804 on a touch-sensitive display including user interface 1802. In some embodiments, one or more of the multiple objects can be associated with one of the multiple contacts. For example, first object 1808 can be associated with contact Steve Jones. Accordingly, first object 1808 can include a set of initials (e.g., SJ), which can be displayed within first object 1808. In some embodiments, the geometry of the initials can be a monogram, such as, but not limited to, stylized, interwoven, or overlapping initials. Similarly, second object 1810 can include the initials "AS," and third object 1812 can include the initials "IS." In some embodiments, the user interface can include 12 objects, each arranged in a position corresponding to the hours on a standard clock or dial (e.g., an object at the first hour, the second hour, the third hour, etc.). In other embodiments, there may be 6 objects arranged at positions corresponding to every two hours on a standard clock, or 24 objects at positions corresponding to every 30 minutes.

用户界面1802还可以包括可供件1804,其可以根据可视指示符1806相对于多个对象中的对象的位置来显示可视外观。例如,可供件的可视外观可以是表示多个联系人的联系人的首字母的集合,或者是表示多个联系人的联系人的图像的集合。如图18A中所示,可供件1804的可视外观可以是与第一对象1808相关联的联系人的图像。User interface 1802 may also include affordance 1804, which may display a visual appearance based on the position of visual indicator 1806 relative to an object in the plurality of objects. For example, the visual appearance of the affordance may be a collection of initials of contacts representing a plurality of contacts, or a collection of images of contacts representing a plurality of contacts. As shown in FIG18A , the visual appearance of affordance 1804 may be an image of a contact associated with first object 1808.

在一些实施例中,电子设备1800可以配置为接收对应于可旋转输入机构1820的旋转的第一输入。而且,如图18B中所示,电子设备1800可以配置为响应于接收与可旋转输入机构1820的旋转对应的输入,更新可供件1804的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人(例如“IS”)。而且,用户界面1802可以包括与多个对象的第一对象1808相关联的可视指示符1806,多个联系人的第一联系人(例如“Steve”)相关联的第一对象。In some embodiments, electronic device 1800 may be configured to receive a first input corresponding to a rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1820. Furthermore, as shown in FIG18B , electronic device 1800 may be configured to update the visual appearance of affordance 1804 to represent a second contact (e.g., “IS”) in the plurality of contacts in response to receiving the input corresponding to the rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1820. Furthermore, user interface 1802 may include a visual indicator 1806 associated with a first object 1808 of the plurality of objects, the first object associated with the first contact (e.g., “Steve”) in the plurality of contacts.

作为示例,电子设备1800可以配置为从用户接收期望通信或以其它方式细想多个联系人的另一联系人的输入。基于可旋转输入机构1820的旋转,可供件1804的可视外观可以从第一对象1808变化到第三对象1812,如图18B所示。附加地,可视指示符1806的位置和移动可以对应于可旋转输入机构1820的旋转。如此,当可旋转输入机构被旋转时,可视指示符1806可以以循环的方式围绕可供件1804从一个对象移动到另一个对象。As an example, electronic device 1800 may be configured to receive input from a user indicating a desire to communicate or otherwise consider another contact of the plurality of contacts. Based on the rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1820, the visual appearance of affordance 1804 may change from first object 1808 to third object 1812, as shown in FIG18B . Additionally, the position and movement of visual indicator 1806 may correspond to the rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1820. Thus, as rotatable input mechanism is rotated, visual indicator 1806 may move from one object to another in a circular manner around affordance 1804.

特别地,例如,响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构1820的旋转的第一输入,电子设备1800可以配置为停止将可视指示符1806与多个对象的第一对象1808相关联,而将可视指示符1806与多个对象中与多个联系人的第二联系人(例如与第二对象1810相关联的联系人)相关联的对象进行关联。In particular, for example, in response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism 1820, the electronic device 1800 can be configured to stop associating the visual indicator 1806 with a first object 1808 of a plurality of objects, and instead associate the visual indicator 1806 with an object in the plurality of objects that is associated with a second contact of the plurality of contacts (e.g., a contact associated with the second object 1810).

在一些实施例中,电子设备1800可以配置为根据位置值来显示作为部分用户界面1802的可视指示符1806。例如,该值可以在位置值的范围内,其中多个对象中的每个对象可以与位置值范围内的位置相关联。而且,电子设备1800可以配置为确定第一输入是否是请求更新可视指示符1806的位置值到第二位置值,该第二位置值不与多个对象的对象相关联。In some embodiments, electronic device 1800 can be configured to display visual indicator 1806 as part of user interface 1802 based on a position value. For example, the value can be within a range of position values, where each of the plurality of objects can be associated with a position within the range of position values. Furthermore, electronic device 1800 can be configured to determine whether the first input is a request to update the position value of visual indicator 1806 to a second position value that is not associated with an object of the plurality of objects.

如此,电子设备1800可以配置为将可视指示符快动(snap)到多个对象中最近或最接近的对象。特别地,电子设备配置为将可视指示符1806的位置值更新到第三位置值并且根据第三位置值更新可视指示符的显示,该第三位置值对应于多个对象中最接近位置值范围内的第二位置值的对象的位置值。例如,前述的显示更新可以基于确定了第一输入是请求更新可视指示符1806的位置值到第二位置值来执行,该第二位置值不与多个对象的对象相关联。Thus, the electronic device 1800 can be configured to snap the visual indicator to the nearest or closest object among the multiple objects. Specifically, the electronic device is configured to update the position value of the visual indicator 1806 to a third position value and update the display of the visual indicator according to the third position value, the third position value corresponding to the position value of the object closest to the second position value within the position value range among the multiple objects. For example, the aforementioned display update can be performed based on determining that the first input is a request to update the position value of the visual indicator 1806 to the second position value, which second position value is not associated with an object among the multiple objects.

电子设备1800也可以基于接收的输入快动到或以其它方式移动到最近的或另一对象以便增强用户体验。例如,为了确保可视指示符1806靠近或者以其它方式与对象相关联,电子设备1800可以配置为初始地确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符1806与多个联系人的第二联系人(例如第二对象1810)相关联。而且,电子设备可以配置为根据确定了可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人的第二联系人相关联,来确定可视指示符1806的位置是否在对象转换区域中。在一些实施例中,对象转换区域可以是位于第一对象1808之后的区域以及位于与第二联系人相关联的第二对象1810之前的区域。The electronic device 1800 may also be fast-moved to or otherwise moved to the nearest or another object based on the received input to enhance the user experience. For example, to ensure that the visual indicator 1806 is close to or otherwise associated with the object, the electronic device 1800 may be configured to initially determine that the rotation of the rotatable input mechanism does not cause the visual indicator 1806 to be associated with a second contact of the plurality of contacts (e.g., a second object 1810). Moreover, the electronic device may be configured to determine whether the position of the visual indicator 1806 is within the object transition area based on determining that the rotation of the rotatable input mechanism does not cause the visual indicator to be associated with the second contact of the plurality of contacts. In some embodiments, the object transition area may be an area behind the first object 1808 and an area before the second object 1810 associated with the second contact.

附加地,电子设备1800可以配置为根据确定了可视指示符1806的位置在对象转换区域中,将可视指示符1806与多个联系人的第二联系人相关联。而且,电子设备1800可以配置为根据确定了可视指示符1806的位置不在对象转换区域中,来维持可视指示符1806与多个联系人的第一对象1806的关联。Additionally, the electronic device 1800 may be configured to associate the visual indicator 1806 with a second contact of the plurality of contacts based on determining that the position of the visual indicator 1806 is within the object transition region. Furthermore, the electronic device 1800 may be configured to maintain the association of the visual indicator 1806 with the first object 1806 of the plurality of contacts based on determining that the position of the visual indicator 1806 is not within the object transition region.

在一些实施例中,如图18C中图示,电子设备1800可以配置为接收第一输入,该第一输入对应于在包括用户界面1802的触敏显示器上的对象(例如第三对象1812)的联系人处的接触。例如,输入可以表示在包括用户界面1802的触敏显示器上经由手指1830的触摸/接触。而且,电子设备1800可以配置为响应于接收对应于在包括用户界面1802的触敏显示器上的对象(例如第三对象1812)的位置处的联系人的输入,更新可供件1804的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人(例如“IS”)。In some embodiments, as illustrated in Figure 18C, electronic device 1800 may be configured to receive a first input corresponding to a contact at a contact of an object (e.g., third object 1812) on a touch-sensitive display that includes user interface 1802. For example, the input may represent a touch/contact via finger 1830 on the touch-sensitive display that includes user interface 1802. Furthermore, electronic device 1800 may be configured to update the visual appearance of affordance 1804 to represent a second contact (e.g., "IS") from the plurality of contacts in response to receiving the input corresponding to a contact at the location of an object (e.g., third object 1812) on the touch-sensitive display that includes user interface 1802.

在一些实施例中,多个对象中的每个对象可以不与联系人相关联。例如,对象1840a-1840i其中每个都可以不与相应的联系人相关联,可以显示的与和联系人相关联的对象(例如第一对象1808、第二对象1810和第三对象1812)不同。如此,不同的尺寸、形状和/或图案可以指示可用的或空的对象位置。In some embodiments, each of the plurality of objects may not be associated with a contact. For example, objects 1840a-1840i, each of which may not be associated with a corresponding contact, may be displayed differently from objects associated with a contact (e.g., first object 1808, second object 1810, and third object 1812). Thus, different sizes, shapes, and/or patterns may indicate available or empty object locations.

而且,在一些实施例中,多个对象中的每个可以与唯一的颜色方案相关联和/或包括唯一的颜色方案。例如,第一对象1808可以是第一颜色,第二对象1810可以是第二颜色,第三对象1812可以是第三颜色,并且对象1840a-1840i中的每个对象可以是另一颜色。在这样的实施例中,每个对象的颜色可以与另一颜色不同。如此,在非限制性示例中,图18A可以包括12个不同的颜色,每个颜色与单个对象相关联。Furthermore, in some embodiments, each of the multiple objects can be associated with and/or include a unique color scheme. For example, first object 1808 can be a first color, second object 1810 can be a second color, third object 1812 can be a third color, and each of objects 1840a-1840i can be another color. In such embodiments, the color of each object can be different from another color. Thus, in a non-limiting example, Figure 18A can include 12 different colors, each color associated with a single object.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符1806可以是离散的区域,其中可供件1804的一个或多个所显示的颜色被改变。例如,电子设备1800可以配置为改变可视指示符的颜色从基于多个对象中的第一对象1808的颜色的第一颜色到基于多个对象中的第二对象1810的颜色的第二颜色。此外,电子设备1800可以配置为改变可视指示符1806的颜色从与多个对象中的第一对象1808相关联的第一颜色到与多个联系人的第二联系人(例如和第二对象1810)相关联的第二颜色。特别地,电子设备1800可以配置为随着可视指示符1806从与第一对象1808相关联的第一位置移动到与联系人相关联的第二对象1810的位置之前的第二位置,而混合第一颜色和第二颜色。In some embodiments, visual indicator 1806 can be a discrete area where the displayed color of one or more of affordances 1804 is changed. For example, electronic device 1800 can be configured to change the color of the visual indicator from a first color based on the color of first object 1808 in the plurality of objects to a second color based on the color of second object 1810 in the plurality of objects. Additionally, electronic device 1800 can be configured to change the color of visual indicator 1806 from a first color associated with first object 1808 in the plurality of objects to a second color associated with a second contact (e.g., and second object 1810) in the plurality of contacts. In particular, electronic device 1800 can be configured to blend the first color and the second color as visual indicator 1806 moves from a first position associated with first object 1808 to a second position that is prior to the position of second object 1810 associated with a contact.

在进一步实施例中,当可视指示符1806处于与第一对象1808的至少一部分交叠的第一位置并且第一对象1808的一个或多个显示颜色被改变时,可视指示符1806可以与多个对象中的第一对象1808相关联。电子设备1800可以配置为显示可视指示符1806的移动。特别地,电子设备1800可以配置为将可视指示符1806从第一位置转移到与第二对象1810的至少部分相交叠的第二位置并且第二对象1810的一个或多个显示颜色被改变。In a further embodiment, when the visual indicator 1806 is in a first position that overlaps at least a portion of the first object 1808 and one or more displayed colors of the first object 1808 are changed, the visual indicator 1806 may be associated with the first object 1808 of the plurality of objects. The electronic device 1800 may be configured to display the movement of the visual indicator 1806. In particular, the electronic device 1800 may be configured to move the visual indicator 1806 from the first position to a second position that overlaps at least a portion of the second object 1810 and one or more displayed colors of the second object 1810 are changed.

在一些实施例中,电子设备1800可以配置为更新可供件1804的可视外观。附加地,在更新可供件的可视外观之后,电子设备1800可以配置为接收与多个对象中选择第三对象1812相对应的第二输入,其中第三对象与第一对象1808和第二对象1810不同。相应的,电子设备1800可以配置为更新可供件1806的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第三联系人。In some embodiments, electronic device 1800 may be configured to update the visual appearance of affordance 1804. Additionally, after updating the visual appearance of the affordance, electronic device 1800 may be configured to receive a second input corresponding to selecting a third object 1812 from the plurality of objects, where the third object is different from first object 1808 and second object 1810. Accordingly, electronic device 1800 may be configured to update the visual appearance of affordance 1806 to represent the third contact from the plurality of contacts.

在图18F中所示的另一实施例中,电子设备1800可以配置为显示用户界面屏幕1802-1用于与由可供件1804表示且与可供件1804相关联的所选择的联系人(例如图18F中所示的Steve)交互。在一些实施例中,设备1800在接收合适的输入或满足某一条件之后,在显示关于图18A-18D所描述的多个接口中的一个接口的同时,显示联系人屏幕1802-1。例如,电子设备1800可以在预定时间量已经流逝而没有进一步旋转机构1820时,进入联系人特定屏幕1802-1。特别地,电子设备1800可以配置为在更新可供件1804的可视外观之后确定对于时间段没有接收到输入。在一些实施例中,电子设备1800可以响应于确定对于时间段没有接收到输入,来停止显示多个对象。电子设备还可以响应于确定对于时间段没有接收到输入,来显示一个或多个第二可供件(例如可供件1834)。In another embodiment shown in FIG18F , electronic device 1800 can be configured to display user interface screen 1802-1 for interacting with a selected contact (e.g., Steve, shown in FIG18F ) represented by and associated with affordance 1804. In some embodiments, device 1800, upon receiving appropriate input or satisfying a condition, displays contact screen 1802-1 while displaying one of the multiple interfaces described with respect to FIG18A-18D . For example, electronic device 1800 can enter contact-specific screen 1802-1 when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed without further rotation of mechanism 1820. In particular, electronic device 1800 can be configured to determine, after updating the visual appearance of affordance 1804, that no input has been received for a time period. In some embodiments, electronic device 1800 can cease displaying the plurality of objects in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period. The electronic device can also display one or more second affordances (e.g., affordance 1834) in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period.

在另一实施例中,电子设备可以基于检测到第三输入而进入联系人-特定屏幕,该第三输入对于在更新可供件1806的可视外观之后可供件的选择。相应地,电子设备1800可以响应于检测第三输入而放弃(fogo)显示多个对象。电子设备1800可以响应于检测第三输入而显示第二可供件。In another embodiment, the electronic device may enter a contact-specific screen based on detecting a third input for selection of an affordance after updating the visual appearance of affordance 1806. Accordingly, electronic device 1800 may forgo displaying the plurality of objects in response to detecting the third input. Electronic device 1800 may display the second affordance in response to detecting the third input.

在一些实施例中,在联系人-特定屏幕内的第二可供件(例如图18F可以包括一个或多个可供件,诸如但不限于呼叫可供件1814、消息可供件1816、辅导可供件1832、恢复包括含有可供件1834的多个对象的用户界面的可供件、以及绘图可供件1818,每个在后面详细描述)。在一些实施例中,可供件1834用作“后退”按钮以恢复先前的屏幕或预先选择的屏幕(例如图18A到18D的用户界面)。例如,电子设备可以检测辅导可供件1832的选择。特别地,电子设备可以检测对应于辅导可供件1832的选择的第四输入。响应于第四输入,电子设备1800可以显示包括用于操作电子设备的一个或多个指令(例如用于如何绘制图像或发送触摸的指令)的用户界面。在一些方面,辅导可供件1832可以在其已经被访问设定的次数之后而消失。用户界面屏幕1802-1提供用户一个或多个可供件用于与由可供件1804表示的联系人(即表示的联系人)联系,而且同时通过省略或停止显示不与当前选择的联系人相关联的显示对象来减少认知失调。In some embodiments, a second affordance within a contact-specific screen (e.g., FIG. 18F may include one or more affordances, such as, but not limited to, a call affordance 1814, a message affordance 1816, a coaching affordance 1832, an affordance that restores a user interface including multiple objects including affordance 1834, and a drawing affordance 1818, each described in detail below) is displayed. In some embodiments, affordance 1834 functions as a “back” button to restore a previous screen or a pre-selected screen (e.g., the user interfaces of FIG. 18A through 18D ). For example, the electronic device may detect selection of coaching affordance 1832. In particular, the electronic device may detect a fourth input corresponding to selection of coaching affordance 1832. In response to the fourth input, electronic device 1800 may display a user interface including one or more instructions for operating the electronic device (e.g., instructions for how to draw an image or send a touch). In some aspects, coaching affordance 1832 may disappear after it has been accessed a set number of times. User interface screen 1802 - 1 provides the user with one or more affordances for connecting with the contact represented by affordance 1804 (ie, the represented contact), while simultaneously reducing cognitive dissonance by omitting or ceasing to display display objects not associated with the currently selected contact.

附加地,在一些实施例中,如图18A所示,多个对象中的每个对象可以与时钟的小时标记相关联和/或根据时钟的小时标记来定位。在一些实施例中,多个对象可以包括12个圆形的对象位于可供件1804周围。然而,应理解的是多于12个或少于12个对象可以定位在用户界面1802上。Additionally, in some embodiments, as shown in Figure 18A, each object in the plurality of objects can be associated with and/or positioned according to the hour markings of a clock. In some embodiments, the plurality of objects can include 12 circular objects positioned around affordance 1804. However, it should be understood that more or fewer than 12 objects can be positioned on user interface 1802.

用户界面1802可以还包括呼叫/电话可供件1814。例如,一旦接收到表示呼叫/电话可供件1814的联系人或选择的输入,电子设备1800可以使得能够呼叫多个联系人中的联系人(例如显示在中央可供件1804处的所选择的联系人)。用户界面1802还可以包括消息可供件1816。例如,一旦接收到表示消息可供件1816的联系人或选择的输入,电子设备1800可以使得能够呼叫多个联系人中的联系人(例如显示在中央可供件1804处的所选择的联系人)。User interface 1802 may also include a call/phone affordance 1814. For example, upon receiving input representing a contact or selection of call/phone affordance 1814, electronic device 1800 may enable a call to a contact in the plurality of contacts (e.g., the selected contact displayed at center affordance 1804). User interface 1802 may also include a message affordance 1816. For example, upon receiving input representing a contact or selection of message affordance 1816, electronic device 1800 may enable a call to a contact in the plurality of contacts (e.g., the selected contact displayed at center affordance 1804).

用户界面1802指示符1824(图18A),其提供来自与和指示符(对象1812)相邻的对象相关联的联系人的一个或多个未读消息的指示。在一些实施例中,指示符1824可以包括数字或未读消息的数量的一些其它视觉指示。相应地,电子设备1800可以配置为确定从多个联系人中的一个联系人接收的一个或多个消息是否没有被读取,以及根据确定从多个联系人中的一个联系人接收的消息没有被读取,来显示靠近与一个或多个消息相关联的多个对象中的对象(例如图18A中的第三对象1824)的指示符1824。User interface 1802 indicator 1824 (Figure 18A) provides an indication of one or more unread messages from a contact associated with an object adjacent to the indicator (object 1812). In some embodiments, indicator 1824 may include a number or some other visual indication of the number of unread messages. Accordingly, electronic device 1800 may be configured to determine whether one or more messages received from a contact in a plurality of contacts have not been read, and based on determining that a message received from a contact in a plurality of contacts has not been read, display indicator 1824 adjacent to an object in a plurality of objects associated with the one or more messages (e.g., third object 1824 in Figure 18A).

图18E图示示例用户界面用于增加或以其它方式将联系人关联到对象。在一些实施例中,可视指示符可以定位靠近空对象1840a。空对象1840a可以是转换成包括加号图标的空的圆圈位置。而且,可供件1804还可以包括指示联系人增加进程的加号图标。附加地,在图18E中选择可供件1804可以启动或以其它方式触发联系人选择进程。Figure 18E illustrates an example user interface for adding or otherwise associating a contact to an object. In some embodiments, a visual indicator can be positioned near empty object 1840a. Empty object 1840a can be an empty circle location that is converted to include a plus icon. Furthermore, affordance 1804 can also include a plus icon indicating the progress of adding a contact. Additionally, selecting affordance 1804 in Figure 18E can initiate or otherwise trigger the contact selection process.

例如,电子设备1800可以接收表示可旋转输入机构1820的第二旋转的输入,并且作为响应,可以确定可视指示符1804是否靠近不与任何联系人相关联的对象(例如对象1804a)。而且,电子设备1800可以根据确定了可视指示符1806靠近不与任何联系人相关联的对象,来更新可供件1804的显示到增加联系人可供件。电子设备1800可以接收对应于增加联系人的选择的另一输入,并且响应于接收第十四输入,显示用户界面用于增加联系人。For example, electronic device 1800 may receive an input representing a second rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1820 and, in response, may determine whether visual indicator 1804 is proximate to an object that is not associated with any contact (e.g., object 1804a). Furthermore, electronic device 1800 may update the display of affordance 1804 to an add contact affordance based on determining that visual indicator 1806 is proximate to an object that is not associated with any contact. Electronic device 1800 may receive another input corresponding to a selection to add a contact and, in response to receiving a fourteenth input, display a user interface for adding a contact.

图18G-18I图示触敏显示器的附加的示例实施例,包括在电子设备1800处的用户界面1802并且具有与第一对象1808相关联的可视指示符1850。如图18G中所示,第一对象1808与由中央可供件1804表示的当前所选择的联系人相关联。在这样的实施例中,可视指示符1850可以提供用户与对象1808相关联的联系人被当前选择的指示。在图18G中,可视指示符1850被描绘为稍大于1808的圆形;然而,在其它实施例中,可视指示符1850可以不同地呈现并且仍然向用户传达当前选择的对象。Figures 18G-18I illustrate additional example embodiments of a touch-sensitive display, including user interface 1802 at electronic device 1800 and having a visual indicator 1850 associated with first object 1808. As shown in Figure 18G, first object 1808 is associated with the currently selected contact represented by central affordance 1804. In such an embodiment, visual indicator 1850 can provide the user with an indication that the contact associated with object 1808 is currently selected. In Figure 18G, visual indicator 1850 is depicted as a circle that is slightly larger than 1808; however, in other embodiments, visual indicator 1850 can be presented differently and still convey to the user the currently selected object.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符1850可以被呈现为具有与当前选择的对象(例如对象1808)相同尺度和维度的形成的对象。在一些实施例中,可视指示符是在用户界面的前台中呈现的对象,以便其挡住在可视指示符下方的用户界面的元素。在其它实施例中,可视指示符是半透明的或透明的前台对象,以便用户界面的下面的元素在可视指示符下方是可见的。在这样的实施例中,可视指示符可以操作为过滤器以改变可视指示符下方的用户界面元素的可视外观。In some embodiments, visual indicator 1850 can be presented as an object having the same scale and dimensions as the currently selected object (e.g., object 1808). In some embodiments, the visual indicator is an object presented in the foreground of the user interface so that it blocks the elements of the user interface below the visual indicator. In other embodiments, the visual indicator is a translucent or transparent foreground object so that the following elements of the user interface are visible below the visual indicator. In such embodiments, the visual indicator can operate as a filter to change the visual appearance of the user interface elements below the visual indicator.

在其它实施例中,可视指示符可以被分离地显示;甚至可视指示符1850可以是预定义区域,其中接口的下方的元素的外观(例如颜色、亮度、对比度的变化)被改变。在一些这样的实施例中,可视指示符可以呈现像“聚光灯”效果,由此由可视指示符1850占用的当前预定义区域内的部分或全部下降的对象具有被改变的外观,以便它们的外观(或者可视指示符区域内的至少部分)被强调或改变(例如颜色、亮度、对比度的变化)。注意这样的效果可以视觉上非常类似于操作为过滤交叠的可视指示符,如上文所述,尽管本领域技术人员将意识到相似的视觉效果不同地被实施。在一些实施例中,像聚光灯的可视指示符可以仅改变可供件1804周围的圆形中呈阵列的对象(例如1808、1810、1812)的外观,而不改变可以在可视指示符的区域内的用户界面1802的背景的任意部分的外观。In other embodiments, the visual indicator can be displayed separately; even visual indicator 1850 can be a predefined area where the appearance (e.g., a change in color, brightness, contrast) of the elements below the interface is changed. In some such embodiments, the visual indicator can present a "spotlight" effect, whereby objects that are partially or completely below within the current predefined area occupied by visual indicator 1850 have an altered appearance so that their appearance (or at least the portion within the visual indicator area) is emphasized or changed (e.g., a change in color, brightness, contrast). Note that such an effect can be visually very similar to a visual indicator that operates to filter overlap, as described above, although those skilled in the art will appreciate that similar visual effects are implemented differently. In some embodiments, the spotlight-like visual indicator can only change the appearance of the objects arrayed in a circle around affordance 1804 (e.g., 1808, 1810, 1812), without changing the appearance of any portion of the background of user interface 1802 that may be within the area of the visual indicator.

在一些实施例中,可视指示符1850的外观可以是混合颜色,该混合颜色由随着可视指示符1850在对象之间移动的一个对象的颜色和另一个对象的颜色组成。特别地,可视指示符1850的外观可以是基于交叠的百分比的混合颜色。例如,蓝色可以与第一对象1850相关联,而红色与第二对象1810相关联。相应地,可视指示符1850的颜色可以是第一颜色的第一百分比和第二颜色的第二百分比,取决于X和Y交叠。如此,随着可视指示符1850在对象之间移动,其颜色可以基于前面的对象(例如第一对象1808)的颜色和相邻的对象(例如第二对象1810)的颜色之间的逆成比例关系而被动态地更新。也即,随着可视指示符1850朝着第二对象移动,第二对象的颜色将比第一对象的颜色在可视指示符1850的颜色中权重更重。换言之,随着可视指示符1850从第一对象移动到第二对象,形成可视指示符1850的颜色的第一对象的颜色百分比将随着可视指示符1850朝向或更接近第二对象1810移动而减小,并且如此,第二对象的颜色的百分比将增大。In some embodiments, the appearance of visual indicator 1850 can be a blended color composed of the color of one object and the color of another object as visual indicator 1850 moves between objects. Specifically, the appearance of visual indicator 1850 can be a blended color based on the percentage of overlap. For example, blue can be associated with first object 1850, while red can be associated with second object 1810. Accordingly, the color of visual indicator 1850 can be a first percentage of the first color and a second percentage of the second color, depending on the X and Y overlap. In this way, as visual indicator 1850 moves between objects, its color can be dynamically updated based on the inverse proportional relationship between the color of the preceding object (e.g., first object 1808) and the color of the adjacent object (e.g., second object 1810). In other words, as visual indicator 1850 moves toward the second object, the color of the second object will be more heavily weighted in the color of visual indicator 1850 than the color of the first object. In other words, as visual indicator 1850 moves from a first object to a second object, the percentage of the first object's color that forms the color of visual indicator 1850 will decrease as visual indicator 1850 moves toward or closer to second object 1810, and as such, the percentage of the second object's color will increase.

在图18H中,响应于对应于机构1820的旋转的输入,可视指示符1850已经移动到在对象1808和对象1810之间中的第二位置。可视指示符1808现在与对象1808和对象1810中的每个部分地交叠。图18I示出第三位置中的可视指示符,并且现在与对象1810相关联并且不再交叠,或者与对象1808相关联。虽然没有描绘,在机构1820上继续的旋转输入可以使得可视指示符进一步移动沿着圆形到对象1812等,以便可视指示符可以沿着形成在可供件1804周围的回路从对象到对象移动。为了实现用户能够沿着回路(例如从对象1808、1810、1812等)控制可视指示符1850的移动,“磁性的”关系与每个可选择的对象和可视指示符1850之间相关联。每个元素(例如1808、1810、1812)与仿真的磁性值相关联。在该示例中,元素1808、1810、1812的磁性值是相等的。在其它示例中,磁性值可以不同,以便可视指示符1850可以具有针对一个对象相对于另一对象的更多磁性亲和力。In FIG18H , in response to an input corresponding to a rotation of mechanism 1820, visual indicator 1850 has moved to a second position between object 1808 and object 1810. Visual indicator 1808 now partially overlaps each of object 1808 and object 1810. FIG18I shows the visual indicator in a third position, now associated with object 1810 and no longer overlapping, or associated with, object 1808. Although not depicted, continued rotational input on mechanism 1820 may cause the visual indicator to move further along the circle, to object 1812, and so on, so that the visual indicator may move from object to object along the loop formed around affordance 1804. To enable the user to control the movement of visual indicator 1850 along the loop (e.g., from objects 1808, 1810, 1812, and so on), a "magnetic" relationship is associated between each selectable object and visual indicator 1850. Each element (e.g., 1808, 1810, 1812) is associated with a simulated magnetic value. In this example, the magnetic values of elements 1808, 1810, 1812 are equal. In other examples, the magnetic values can be different so that visual indicator 1850 can have more magnetic affinity for one object relative to another object.

在对象和可视指示符1850之间使用磁性关系,基于物理的建模可以用于仿真对象和可视指示符之间的磁性吸引力。结果,当用户输入在可视指示符1850没有与任意对象对准(例如图18H中描绘的第二位置)的同时没有取得时,可视指示符1850最后在其与对象中的一个(例如1808、1810、1812等)对准的地方到达稳定的状态。当可视指示符由于旋转机构1820没有被转换或者移动时,可视指示符1850被认为处于稳定状态中。该基于物理的磁性建模导致用户界面展示虚拟制动,其协助用户使用可视指示符1850来选择对象,而不需要用于可视指示符的精确的定位或者重新定位。而且,该行为限制其中两个对象同时由可视指示符1850(例如图18H)指示的实例,其减少认知失调。Using a magnetic relationship between an object and a visual indicator 1850, physics-based modeling can be used to simulate the magnetic attraction between the object and the visual indicator. As a result, when the user input is not obtained while the visual indicator 1850 is not aligned with any object (e.g., the second position depicted in Figure 18H), the visual indicator 1850 eventually reaches a stable state where it is aligned with one of the objects (e.g., 1808, 1810, 1812, etc.). When the visual indicator is not converted or moved due to the rotation mechanism 1820, the visual indicator 1850 is considered to be in a stable state. This physics-based magnetic modeling causes the user interface to display a virtual brake, which assists the user in selecting an object using the visual indicator 1850 without the need for precise positioning or repositioning of the visual indicator. Moreover, this behavior limits instances in which two objects are simultaneously indicated by the visual indicator 1850 (e.g., Figure 18H), which reduces cognitive dissonance.

在该示例中,基于物理的磁性建模被实现,例如通过将每个对象(例如1808、1810、1812等)建模为由创建其自身持续磁场的磁化材料制作的对象,并且将可视指示符1850建模为被吸引到磁体的材料,诸如铁磁材料,包括铁、钴和镍。在另一示例中,基于物理的建模可以通过将每个对象建模为由吸引到磁体的材料制成的对象来实现,以及将可视指示符1850建模为创建其自身持续磁场的材料。在另一示例中,基于物理的建模可以通过将每个对象建模为创建其自身持续磁场的对象,以及将可视指示符1850建模为还创建其自身持续磁场的材料,诸如吸引的两个磁体。这些基于物理的模型的每个模型可以适于包括变化而不是保持持续的磁场,基于某些因素,诸如给定对象和可视指示符1850之间的距离、可视指示符1850的速度、可视指示符1850的加速度或基于两个或更多因素的组合。例如,变化的磁场可以通过使用电磁体而被仿真,该电磁体可以被开启或关断并且可以具有变化的强度。在一些实施例中,磁性建模是于2014年9月3日提交的名称为“USER INTERFACE FORMANIPULATING USER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES”的美国非临时专利申请14/476,657或者于2014年9月3日提交的名称为“USER INTERFACE FOR MANIPULATINGUSER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES”的PCT专利申请序列号PCT/US2014/053961中描述的模型,两者针对至少它们的运动的磁性模型的公开内容通过引用合并于此。In this example, physics-based magnetic modeling is implemented, for example, by modeling each object (e.g., 1808, 1810, 1812, etc.) as an object made of a magnetized material that creates its own persistent magnetic field, and modeling the visual indicator 1850 as a material that is attracted to magnets, such as ferromagnetic materials including iron, cobalt, and nickel. In another example, physics-based modeling can be implemented by modeling each object as an object made of a material that is attracted to magnets, and modeling the visual indicator 1850 as a material that creates its own persistent magnetic field. In another example, physics-based modeling can be implemented by modeling each object as an object that creates its own persistent magnetic field, and modeling the visual indicator 1850 as a material that also creates its own persistent magnetic field, such as two magnets that attract. Each of these physics-based models can be adapted to include a magnetic field that changes rather than remains persistent, based on certain factors, such as the distance between a given object and the visual indicator 1850, the speed of the visual indicator 1850, the acceleration of the visual indicator 1850, or a combination of two or more factors. For example, a varying magnetic field can be simulated using an electromagnet that can be turned on or off and can have varying strengths. In some embodiments, the magnetic modeling is the model described in U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 14/476,657, filed on September 3, 2014, entitled "USER INTERFACE FOR MANIPULATING USER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES," or PCT Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2014/053961, filed on September 3, 2014, entitled "USER INTERFACE FOR MANIPULATING USER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES," both of which are incorporated herein by reference for their disclosure of at least their magnetic models of motion.

参考图18H和18I,在一些实施例中,如果机构1820的转动会导致可视指示符1850转换到诸如图18H中所示的位置,则设备1800可以将可视指示符1850快动到最近的对象(在这种情况下,对象1810)。如图18I中所示,不允许可视指示符1850在对象1808和1810之间维持稳定状态,设备1800确定对象在可视指示符1850上具有最多磁性影响(例如在对象1808和1810具有相同的磁性值的情况下的最接近的对象)并且将可视指示符“快动”到那个对象。如图18I中所示,该确定导致将可视指示符快动到对象1810。18H and 18I , in some embodiments, if the rotation of mechanism 1820 causes visual indicator 1850 to transition to a position such as shown in FIG18H , device 1800 may snap visual indicator 1850 to the nearest object (in this case, object 1810). As shown in FIG18I , visual indicator 1850 is not allowed to maintain a stable state between objects 1808 and 1810. Device 1800 determines that the object has the most magnetic influence on visual indicator 1850 (e.g., the closest object in the case where objects 1808 and 1810 have the same magnetic value) and “snap” the visual indicator to that object. As shown in FIG18I , this determination results in snapping the visual indicator to object 1810.

在一些实施例中,沿着可供件1804周围形成的回路的可视的可视指示符从对象到对象的运动被建模为可视指示符可以占用的一系列潜在位置或潜在位置的范围。对象(例如1808、1810、1812等)可以与沿着一系列潜在位置或潜在位置范围的特定位置相关联。响应于机构1820的旋转,设备1800可以确定输入是否会导致可视指示符转变到与任意对象不关联的系列或范围内的位置(例如图18H中可视指示符1850的位置)。如果是这样,则设备1800可以将可视指示符的位置更新到与对象(图18H中对象1810)关联的最近位置并且随后显示该更新位置处的可视指示符。在一些实施例中,根据基于一系列位置或位置范围的模型的可视指示符的建模运动是根据于2014年9月3日提交的名称为“USER INTERFACE FORMANIPULATING USER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES”的美国非临时专利申请14/476,657或者于2014年9月3日提交的名称为“USER INTERFACE FOR MANIPULATINGUSER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES”的PCT专利申请序列号PCT/US2014/053961中描述的模型来实现,两者通过引用合并于此针对至少它们的基于位置范围或一系列位置建模的公开内容(例如,如关于每个申请的图6A到9B描绘和描述)。In some embodiments, the movement of the visual indicator of the loop formed around the affordance 1804 from object to object is modeled as a range of potential positions or potential positions that the visual indicator can occupy. Objects (e.g., 1808, 1810, 1812, etc.) can be associated with specific positions along a range of potential positions or potential position ranges. In response to the rotation of mechanism 1820, device 1800 can determine whether the input will cause the visual indicator to transition to a position within a series or range that is not associated with any object (e.g., the position of visual indicator 1850 in Figure 18H). If so, device 1800 can update the position of the visual indicator to the most recent position associated with the object (object 1810 in Figure 18H) and then display the visual indicator at the updated position. In some embodiments, modeling motion of a visual indicator based on a model based on a series of positions or a range of positions is implemented according to the model described in U.S. non-provisional patent application 14/476,657, filed on September 3, 2014, entitled “USER INTERFACE FOR MANIPULATING USER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES,” or PCT patent application serial number PCT/US2014/053961, filed on September 3, 2014, entitled “USER INTERFACE FOR MANIPULATING USER INTERFACE OBJECTS WITH MAGNETIC PROPERTIES,” both of which are incorporated herein by reference for at least their disclosures of modeling based on a range of positions or a series of positions (e.g., as depicted and described with respect to Figures 6A through 9B of each application).

在一些实施例中,诸如图18G-18I的实施例,可视指示符被显示在与多个对象中的第一对象(对象1808)相关联的第一位置中。响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的转动的第一输入,设备1800停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联,而将可视指示符与多个对象中与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联的对象(对象1810)相关联。18G-18I , the visual indicator is displayed in a first position associated with a first object in the plurality of objects (object 1808). In response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism, device 1800 stops associating the visual indicator with the first object in the plurality of objects and associates the visual indicator with an object in the plurality of objects that is associated with a second contact in the plurality of contacts (object 1810).

在一些实施例中,诸如图18G-18I的实施例,作为用户界面的部分,设备1800根据位置值来显示可视指示符(可视指示符1850),该值在位置值的范围内,多个对象中的每个对象(例如1808、1810、1812等)与位置值范围内的位置相关联。进一步响应于第一输入(机构1820的旋转),设备1800确定第一输入是否是请求更新可视指示符的位置值到第二位置值,该第二位置值不与多个对象中的对象相关联,或者不与多个对象中的单个对象相关联。根据确定第一输入是请求更新可视指示符的位置值到第二位置值,该第二位置值不与多个对象中的对象相关联,或者不与多个对象中的单个对象相关联,设备1800更新可视指示符的位置值到第三位置值,该第三位置值对应于多个对象中最接近位置值范围内的第二位置值的对象的位置值,并且还根据第三位置值来更新可视指示符的显示。In some embodiments, such as the embodiments of Figures 18G-18I , as part of a user interface, device 1800 displays a visual indicator (visual indicator 1850) based on a position value within a range of position values, each object in a plurality of objects (e.g., 1808, 1810, 1812, etc.) being associated with a position within the range of position values. Further in response to the first input (rotation of mechanism 1820), device 1800 determines whether the first input is a request to update the position value of the visual indicator to a second position value that is not associated with an object in the plurality of objects, or is not associated with a single object in the plurality of objects. Based on determining that the first input is a request to update the position value of the visual indicator to the second position value that is not associated with an object in the plurality of objects, or is not associated with a single object in the plurality of objects, device 1800 updates the position value of the visual indicator to a third position value that corresponds to the position value of the object in the plurality of objects that is closest to the second position value within the range of position values, and further updates the display of the visual indicator based on the third position value.

在一些实施例中,诸如图18G-18I的实施例,可视指示符被显示在与多个对象中的第一对象(对象1808)相关联的第一位置中。响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入,设备1800停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联,而通过以下方式将可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联:确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联。根据确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联,设备1800确定可视指示符的位置是否处于对象转换区域中,其中对象转换区域是位于第一对象之后并且位于与第二联系人相关联的第二对象之前的区域。根据确定可视指示符的位置处于对象转换区域中,设备1800将对象转换区域与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联;并且根据确定可视指示符的位置不处于对象转换区域中,设备1800维持可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象的关联。In some embodiments, such as the embodiments of Figures 18G-18I , a visual indicator is displayed in a first position associated with a first object (object 1808) in the plurality of objects. In response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of a rotatable input mechanism, device 1800 ceases associating the visual indicator with the first object in the plurality of objects and associates the visual indicator with a second contact in the plurality of contacts by determining that the rotation of the rotatable input mechanism did not result in the visual indicator being associated with the second contact in the plurality of contacts. Based on determining that the rotation of the rotatable input mechanism did not result in the visual indicator being associated with the second contact in the plurality of contacts, device 1800 determines whether the position of the visual indicator is within an object transition region, where the object transition region is a region located behind the first object and before a second object associated with the second contact. Based on determining that the position of the visual indicator is within the object transition region, device 1800 associates the object transition region with the second contact in the plurality of contacts; and based on determining that the position of the visual indicator is not within the object transition region, device 1800 maintains the association of the visual indicator with the first object in the plurality of objects.

图18J-18K图示包括在电子设备1800的用户界面1802并且具有页面指示符1860的触敏显示器的实施例。特别地,基于由电子设备1800确定对象的数目满足或超过对象显示限制/阈值,电子设备1800配置为在用户界面1802上显示一个或多个附加的页面和/或一个或多个对象(例如联系人)的用户界面。也即,在一些实施例中,电子设备1800使得用户能够选择并且使得显示的任意数目的对象(例如联系人)以本文关于图18A-18I描述的相似的方式在附加的(例如两个或更多)页面或用户界面上。18J-18K illustrate an embodiment of a touch-sensitive display including a user interface 1802 on an electronic device 1800 and having a page indicator 1860. In particular, based on a determination by the electronic device 1800 that the number of objects meets or exceeds an object display limit/threshold, the electronic device 1800 is configured to display one or more additional pages and/or user interfaces of one or more objects (e.g., contacts) on the user interface 1802. That is, in some embodiments, the electronic device 1800 enables a user to select and cause any number of objects (e.g., contacts) to be displayed on additional (e.g., two or more) pages or user interfaces in a manner similar to that described herein with respect to FIGURES 18A-18I.

例如,在图18J,电子设备1800可以显示一个或多个对象1862的第一集合。附加地,电子设备1800在触敏显示器1802上显示页面指示符1860,该页面指示符1860指示对象在其处指示的页面或用户界面。如图18J中所示,页面指示符1860可以是指示第一页面的第一位置。例如,如图18J所示,第一用户界面包括一个或多个对象的第一集合。在显示第一用户界面(例如第一页面)的同时,电子设备1800可以配置为接收对应于请求显示第二页面的输入。该输入可以是由用户手指1830检测和由触敏显示器1802检测的轻扫手势。For example, in Figure 18J, electronic device 1800 can display a first set of one or more objects 1862. Additionally, electronic device 1800 displays a page indicator 1860 on touch-sensitive display 1802, which indicates the page or user interface at which the object is located. As shown in Figure 18J, page indicator 1860 can be a first position indicating a first page. For example, as shown in Figure 18J, the first user interface includes a first set of one or more objects. While displaying the first user interface (e.g., the first page), electronic device 1800 can be configured to receive an input corresponding to a request to display a second page. The input can be a swipe gesture detected by a user's finger 1830 and detected by touch-sensitive display 1802.

电子设备1800可以配置为响应于接收输入而用第二用户界面(例如第二页面)代替第一用户界面的显示,如图18J所示。电子设备1800可以在第二用户界面处不同于第一位置的第二位置显示页面指示符1860。在一些实施例中,第二页面可以不同于第一页面以便第二页面包括一个或多个对象(例如联系人)的第二集合,每个与多个联系人的联系人相关联。在一些实施例中,一个或多个对象的集合中的对象(例如联系人)可以每个与群组相关联。在一些实施例中,群组是不同的,如在页面之间。例如,第一页面可以具有每个被标识为用户的家庭成员(例如通过用户或基于与联系人相关联的数据)的联系人;第二页面可以具有每个被标识为电子设备1800的用户的同事(例如通过用户或基于与联系人相关联的数据)的联系人。The electronic device 1800 can be configured to replace the display of the first user interface with a second user interface (e.g., a second page) in response to receiving input, as shown in Figure 18J. The electronic device 1800 can display a page indicator 1860 at a second position different from the first position on the second user interface. In some embodiments, the second page can be different from the first page so that the second page includes a second set of one or more objects (e.g., contacts), each associated with a contact of a plurality of contacts. In some embodiments, the objects (e.g., contacts) in the set of one or more objects can each be associated with a group. In some embodiments, the groups are different, such as between pages. For example, the first page can have each contact identified as a family member of the user (e.g., by the user or based on data associated with the contact); the second page can have each contact identified as a colleague of the user of the electronic device 1800 (e.g., by the user or based on data associated with the contact).

在一些实施例中,提供用户多个页面和/或一个或多个对象(例如联系人)的群组可以运行快速访问与用户联系人的通信,由此减少在用户上的认知负担并且通过减少不需要的、外来的、重复的和/或冗余的输入量来产生更有效的人机接口,并且可以创建更快和更有效的用户输入布置,其可以减少所需要的输入量,减少处理功率,并且减少针对其用户界面需要被显示以便用于要访问和执行的期望功能的时间量。In some embodiments, providing a user with multiple pages and/or groups of one or more objects (e.g., contacts) can provide quick access to communications with the user's contacts, thereby reducing the cognitive burden on the user and producing a more efficient human-computer interface by reducing the amount of unnecessary, extraneous, repetitive, and/or redundant input, and can create a faster and more efficient user input arrangement that can reduce the amount of input required, reduce processing power, and reduce the amount of time for which the user interface needs to be displayed in order for a desired function to be accessed and executed.

图19A-19B图示示例用户界面用于显示栩栩如生的联系人的表示。例如,电子设备可以包括包含用户界面1910的触敏显示器1900。附加地,电子设备可以在触敏显示器1910上显示联系人1920的栩栩如生的表示。用户界面1910还可以显示联系人1920的状态1930,其可以包括当前状态和位置。在一个实施例中,联系人1920可以是可用的并且位于伦敦。在另一实施例中并且在另一时间点,联系人1920的状态1930可以被更新以反映曼彻斯特的位置和睡眠的当前状态。Figures 19A-19B illustrate example user interfaces for displaying lifelike representations of contacts. For example, an electronic device may include a touch-sensitive display 1900 including a user interface 1910. Additionally, the electronic device may display a lifelike representation of a contact 1920 on the touch-sensitive display 1910. The user interface 1910 may also display a status 1930 of the contact 1920, which may include a current status and location. In one embodiment, the contact 1920 may be available and located in London. In another embodiment and at another point in time, the status 1930 of the contact 1920 may be updated to reflect a location in Manchester and a current status of sleeping.

在一些实施例中,当可供件表示第一联系人时,可供件(例如可供件1804)的可视外观可以是第一联系人的动画表示。在一些实施例中,更新可供件(例如可供件1804)的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人可以包括更新可供件的可视外观到第二联系人的动画表示,如图19A-19B所示。而且,第一联系人的动画表示可以是动态的并且基于第二联系人的一个或多个时区信息、第二联系人的位置信息、关于由第二联系人指定的状态的信息(例如请勿打扰)。In some embodiments, when the affordance represents a first contact, the visual appearance of the affordance (e.g., affordance 1804) can be an animated representation of the first contact. In some embodiments, updating the visual appearance of the affordance (e.g., affordance 1804) to represent a second contact in the plurality of contacts can include updating the visual appearance of the affordance to an animated representation of the second contact, as shown in Figures 19A-19B. Furthermore, the animated representation of the first contact can be dynamic and based on one or more of the second contact's time zone information, the second contact's location information, and information about a status specified by the second contact (e.g., do not disturb).

图20图示示例用户界面2000用于使得能够在绘图区域内绘图。在一些实施例中,电子设备1800(图18A)可以接收对应于选择绘图可供件1818的输入。特别地,电子设备1800(图18A)可以检测对应于选择绘图可供件1818的第五输入并且可以显示绘图区域2010。绘图区域对应于触摸输入。在另一实施例中,电子设备1800可以检测对应于绘图区域2010中第一笔画的第六输入并且相应地,在绘图区域中显示第一笔画的视觉表示。在一些实施例中,用户界面2000是或者以相似于绘图区域630或绘图区域710的方式来操作。FIG20 illustrates an example user interface 2000 for enabling drawing within a drawing area. In some embodiments, electronic device 1800 ( FIG18A ) may receive an input corresponding to selecting drawing affordance 1818. In particular, electronic device 1800 ( FIG18A ) may detect a fifth input corresponding to selecting drawing affordance 1818 and may display drawing area 2010. The drawing area corresponds to a touch input. In another embodiment, electronic device 1800 may detect a sixth input corresponding to a first stroke in drawing area 2010 and, accordingly, display a visual representation of the first stroke in the drawing area. In some embodiments, user interface 2000 is or operates in a manner similar to drawing area 630 or drawing area 710.

在一些实施例中,电子设备1800(图18A)可以显示沿着笔画的残留2130的动画消散。在一些实施例中,残留的动画消散是彗星样的效果,其被显示在表示用户接触2020的显示器上的位置的尾端。因此,随着用户接触触敏显示器并且在维持接触的同时移动手指,彗星样的效果将形成并被显示在最近的接触位置处。附加地,电子设备1800(图18A)额可以显示在来自绘图区域的笔画的视觉表示的烟雾形状21401中的淡出。在一些实施例中,淡出视觉表示包括显示笔画的逐渐消散的动画(例如消失的绘图笔画的烟雾样的效果)。In some embodiments, the electronic device 1800 ( FIG. 18A ) can display an animated dissipation of the residue 2130 along the stroke. In some embodiments, the animated dissipation of the residue is a comet-like effect that is displayed at the tail end of the location on the display representing the user contact 2020. Thus, as the user contacts the touch-sensitive display and moves the finger while maintaining contact, a comet-like effect will form and be displayed at the most recent contact location. Additionally, the electronic device 1800 ( FIG. 18A ) can display a fade-out in a smoke shape 21401 of the visual representation of the stroke from the drawing area. In some embodiments, fading out the visual representation includes an animation that displays the gradual dissipation of the stroke (e.g., a smoke-like effect of a disappearing drawing stroke).

图21图示示例用户界面2100,具有时钟可供件2120转换成发送可供件2120,基于用户期望将绘图发送到外部设备。特别地,绘图区域2110可以包括绘图时钟可供件2120,其允许仅在绘图区域2110中绘图。而且,对应于选择绘图时钟可供件的输入可以被接收导致禁用绘图区域2110中表示任意笔画的数据的发送。附加地,绘图时钟可供件2120可以用发送可供件2120来代替,发送可供件2120允许传输绘图到外部设备。FIG21 illustrates an example user interface 2100 having a clock affordance 2120 transition to a send affordance 2120 based on a user's desire to transmit a drawing to an external device. Specifically, a drawing area 2110 may include a drawing clock affordance 2120 that allows drawing only within the drawing area 2110. Furthermore, an input corresponding to selecting the drawing clock affordance may be received that disables the transmission of data representing any strokes in the drawing area 2110. Additionally, the drawing clock affordance 2120 may be replaced with a send affordance 2120 that allows the drawing to be transmitted to an external device.

在一些实施例中,用户还可以摇动电子设备1800以去除绘图区域中的最近笔画。例如,电子设备1800可以接收对应于绘图区域中笔画的输入。而且,电子设备1800可以响应于接收该输入而在绘图区域中显示笔画的视觉表示。电子设备1800可以接着检测指示摇动或振动的运动,并且作为响应,可以确定电子设备的运动是否满足运动阈值。如此,电子设备1800可以响应于检测指示摇动运动的输入并且根据确定该运动满足或超过运动阈值而停止显示笔画的视觉表示。In some embodiments, the user can also shake the electronic device 1800 to remove the most recent stroke in the drawing area. For example, the electronic device 1800 can receive input corresponding to a stroke in the drawing area. Furthermore, the electronic device 1800 can display a visual representation of the stroke in the drawing area in response to receiving the input. The electronic device 1800 can then detect a motion indicative of shaking or vibration and, in response, determine whether the motion of the electronic device meets a motion threshold. Thus, the electronic device 1800 can stop displaying the visual representation of the stroke in response to detecting the input indicative of a shaking motion and based on determining that the motion meets or exceeds the motion threshold.

在一些实施例中,电子设备1800可以配置为检测或以其它方式确定用户期望与其通信的另一设备是否能够占用绘图进程。如此,如果联系人没有能够处理和显示表示绘图中笔画的数据的设备,则绘图可供件181不会被提供。In some embodiments, electronic device 1800 can be configured to detect or otherwise determine whether another device with which the user desires to communicate is capable of seizing the drawing process. Thus, if the contact does not have a device capable of processing and displaying data representing the strokes in the drawing, drawing affordance 181 will not be provided.

在附加的实施例中,电子设备1800可以配置为基于在触敏显示器上的长按而记录和发送短的音频消息,同时例如在联系人-特定的屏幕中。特别地,电子设备1800可以配置为检测表示触敏显示器上联系人的另一输入。电子设备1800可以配置为确定12个输入的持续满足或超过接触持续阈值。相应地,电子设备1800根据确定12个输入的持续满足或超过接触持续阈值,记录音频消息。附加地,电子设备1800将音频消息发送到与第二联系人相关联的电子设备。In an additional embodiment, electronic device 1800 can be configured to record and send a short audio message based on a long press on the touch-sensitive display, for example, while in a contact-specific screen. In particular, electronic device 1800 can be configured to detect another input representing a contact on the touch-sensitive display. Electronic device 1800 can be configured to determine whether the duration of the 12 inputs meets or exceeds a contact duration threshold. Accordingly, electronic device 1800 records the audio message based on determining whether the duration of the 12 inputs meets or exceeds the contact duration threshold. Additionally, electronic device 1800 sends the audio message to the electronic device associated with the second contact.

图22是图示根据一些实施例的更新可供件的可视外观的方法2200的流程图。方法2200可以在具有触敏显示器和可旋转输入机构的设备处执行(例如100、300、500、550和1800)。方法2200中的一些操作可以被组合,一些操作的顺序可以被改变,并且一些操作可以被省略。Figure 22 is a flow diagram illustrating a method 2200 for updating the visual appearance of an affordance, according to some embodiments. Method 2200 can be performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display and a rotatable input mechanism (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 550, and 1800). Some operations in method 2200 can be combined, the order of some operations can be changed, and some operations can be omitted.

在一些实施例中,可旋转输入机构(例如可旋转输入机构506)可以配置为接收用户输入。在一些实施例中,方法2200可以在具有触敏表面/显示器(例如112、355和504)的电子设备处被执行。可以执行方法2200的示例设备包括设备100、300、500、550和1800(图1A、图3、图5A和图18A-18I)。In some embodiments, a rotatable input mechanism (e.g., rotatable input mechanism 506) can be configured to receive user input. In some embodiments, method 2200 can be performed at an electronic device having a touch-sensitive surface/display (e.g., 112, 355, and 504). Example devices that can perform method 2200 include devices 100, 300, 500, 550, and 1800 (Figures 1A, 3, 5A, and 18A-18I).

如下面所示,方法2200提供直觉的方式用于通过更新可供件的可视外观来与电子设备交互。该方法减少用户上的物理和/或认知负担,该用户可以在各种活动中占用可旋转输入机构,由此创建更有效的人机接口。As shown below, method 2200 provides an intuitive way to interact with an electronic device by updating the visual appearance of an affordance. The method reduces the physical and/or cognitive burden on a user who may engage a rotatable input mechanism in various activities, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.

在框2202,方法2200可以在触敏显示器上显示包括多个对象的用户界面,每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人以及具有表示多个联系人中的第一联系人的可视外观的可供件相关联。在框2204,方法2200可以接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入。在框2206,方法2200可以响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的输入,更新可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人。At block 2202, method 2200 may display, on a touch-sensitive display, a user interface comprising a plurality of objects, each object associated with a contact in a plurality of contacts and an affordance having a visual appearance representing a first contact in the plurality of contacts. At block 2204, method 2200 may receive a first input corresponding to a rotation of a rotatable input mechanism. At block 2206, method 2200 may, in response to receiving the input corresponding to the rotation of the rotatable input mechanism, update the visual appearance of the affordance to represent a second contact in the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,用户界面还包括与多个对象中的第一对象相关联的可视指示符,第一对象与多个联系人中的第一联系人相关联。According to some embodiments, the user interface further comprises a visual indicator associated with a first object in the plurality of objects, the first object being associated with a first contact in the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,还响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入:停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联;而将可视指示符与多个对象中与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联的对象相关联。According to some embodiments, further in response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism: ceasing to associate the visual indicator with a first object in the plurality of objects; and associating the visual indicator with an object in the plurality of objects associated with a second contact in the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,作为用户界面的部分,根据位置值来显示可视指示符,该值在位置值的范围内,多个对象中的每个对象与位置值范围内的位置相关联;还响应于第一输入,确定第一输入是否是请求将可视指示符的位置值更新到不与多个对象中的对象相关联的第二位置值;根据确定第一输入是请求将可视指示符的位置值更新到不与多个对象中的对象相关联的第二位置值:将可视指示符的位置值更新到第三位置并且根据该第三位置值来更新可视指示符的显示,该第三位置响应于多个对象中最接近位置值范围内的第二位置的位置值。In accordance with some embodiments, as part of a user interface, a visual indicator is displayed based on a position value, which is within a range of position values, each object in a plurality of objects being associated with a position within the range of position values; and in response to a first input, a determination is made as to whether the first input is a request to update the position value of the visual indicator to a second position value that is not associated with an object in the plurality of objects; and based on determining that the first input is a request to update the position value of the visual indicator to a second position value that is not associated with an object in the plurality of objects: updating the position value of the visual indicator to a third position and updating the display of the visual indicator based on the third position value, the third position being responsive to a position value that is closest to the second position in the range of position values among the plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,其中停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联,而将可视指示符与可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系相关联包括:确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人的关联;根据确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人的关联,确定可视指示符的位置是否在对象转换区域中,其中对象转换区域是位于第一对象之后以及位于与第二联系人相关联的第二对象之前的区域;根据确定可视指示符的位置是在对象转换区域中,将可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联;根据确定可视指示符的位置不是在对象转换区域中,维持可视指示符与多个联系人中的第一联系人的关联。According to some embodiments, stopping associating the visual indicator with a first object among multiple objects and associating the visual indicator with a second contact among multiple contacts includes: determining that rotation of the rotatable input mechanism does not result in association of the visual indicator with the second contact among multiple contacts; based on determining that rotation of the rotatable input mechanism does not result in association of the visual indicator with the second contact among multiple contacts, determining whether the position of the visual indicator is in an object conversion area, wherein the object conversion area is an area located after the first object and before a second object associated with the second contact; based on determining that the position of the visual indicator is in the object conversion area, associating the visual indicator with the second contact among multiple contacts; based on determining that the position of the visual indicator is in the object conversion area, maintaining the association of the visual indicator with the first contact among multiple contacts.

根据一些实施例,可视指示符是离散的区域,其中可供件的一个或多个所显示的颜色被改变,该方法还包括:响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入:改变可视指示符的颜色从基于多个对象中的第一对象的颜色的第一颜色到基于多个对象中的第二对象的颜色的第二颜色。In accordance with some embodiments, the visual indicator is a discrete area where one or more displayed colors of the available items are changed, and the method further includes: in response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of a rotatable input mechanism: changing the color of the visual indicator from a first color based on a color of a first object in a plurality of objects to a second color based on a color of a second object in a plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,改变可视指示符的颜色从基于多个对象中的第一对象的颜色的第一颜色到基于多个对象中的第二对象的颜色的第二颜色包括:随着可视指示符从与第一对象相关联的第一位置移动到在与联系人相关联的第二对象的位置前的第二位置时,混合第一颜色和第二颜色。According to some embodiments, changing the color of the visual indicator from a first color based on the color of a first object among a plurality of objects to a second color based on the color of a second object among a plurality of objects includes blending the first color and the second color as the visual indicator moves from a first position associated with the first object to a second position in front of the position of the second object associated with the contact.

根据一些实施例,当可视指示符在第一位置处并且第一对象的一个或多个显示的颜色被改变时,可视指示符用于多个对象中的第一对象相关联,该第一位置与第一对象的至少部分交叠。According to some embodiments, the visual indicator is associated with a first object of the plurality of objects when the visual indicator is at a first location that overlaps at least a portion of the first object and a color of one or more displays of the first object is changed.

根据一些实施例,停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联,而将可视指示符与可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系相关联包括:将可视指示符从第一位置转变到第二位置并且第二对象的一个或多个显示的颜色被改变时,该第二位置与第二对象的至少部分交叠。According to some embodiments, ceasing to associate the visual indicator with a first object among a plurality of objects and associating the visual indicator with a second contact among a plurality of contacts includes transitioning the visual indicator from a first position to a second position that overlaps at least a portion of the second object when one or more displayed colors of the second object are changed.

根据一些实施例,当可供件表示第一联系人时,可供件的可视外观是第一联系人的动画表示,并且其中更新可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人包括更新可供件的可视外观到第二联系人的动画表示。In accordance with some embodiments, when the affordance represents a first contact, the visual appearance of the affordance is an animated representation of the first contact, and wherein updating the visual appearance of the affordance to represent a second contact in the plurality of contacts includes updating the visual appearance of the affordance to the animated representation of the second contact.

根据一些实施例,第一联系人的动画表示是动态地基于从以下组选择信息,包括:第二联系人的时区信息、第二联系人的位置信息、关于由第二联系人指定的状态的信息、以及它们的组合。According to some embodiments, the animated representation of the first contact is dynamically based on selecting information from the group consisting of: time zone information for the second contact, location information for the second contact, information regarding a status specified by the second contact, and combinations thereof.

根据一些实施例,该方法还包括:在更新可供件的可视外观之后,接收对应于多个对象的第三对象的旋转的第二输入,第三对象与第一对象和第二对象不同,响应于接收第二输入,更新可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第三联系人。In accordance with some embodiments, the method further includes, after updating the visual appearance of the affordance, receiving a second input corresponding to a rotation of a third object of the plurality of objects, the third object being different from the first object and the second object, and in response to receiving the second input, updating the visual appearance of the affordance to represent the third contact of the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,在更新可供件的可视外观之后,确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收;并且响应于确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收,放弃显示多个对象。According to some embodiments, after updating the visual appearance of the affordance, determining that no input has been received for a time period; and in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period, relinquishing display of the plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,在更新可供件的可视外观之后,确定对应于可供件的选择的第三输入;并且响应于检测第三输入,放弃显示多个对象。In accordance with some embodiments, after updating the visual appearance of the affordance, determining a third input corresponding to selection of the affordance; and in response to detecting the third input, relinquishing display of the plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,还响应于确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收,显示第二可供件。According to some embodiments, the second affordance is displayed further in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period.

根据一些实施例,还响应于检测第三输入,显示第二可供件。According to some embodiments, further in response to detecting the third input, the second affordance is displayed.

根据一些实施例,第二可供件包括选自以下组的一个或多个可供件,包括:呼叫可供件、消息可供件、辅导可供件、恢复包括多个对象的用户界面的可供件(例如图18F的可供件1834),以及绘图可供件。In accordance with some embodiments, the second affordance includes one or more affordances selected from the group consisting of: a call affordance, a message affordance, a coaching affordance, an affordance that restores a user interface including multiple objects (e.g., affordance 1834 of Figure 18F), and a drawing affordance.

根据一些实施例,第二可供件是辅导可供件,该方法还包括:检测对应于选择辅导可供件的第四输入;并且响应于检测第四输入,显示包括用于操作电子设备的一个或多个指令的用户界面。According to some embodiments, the second affordance is a coaching affordance, the method further comprising: detecting a fourth input corresponding to selection of the coaching affordance; and in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying a user interface comprising one or more instructions for operating the electronic device.

根据一些实施例,第二可供件包括绘图可供件,该方法还包括检测对应于选择绘图可供件的第五输入;并且响应于检测第五输入,显示包括绘图区域,其中绘图区域响应于触摸输入。According to some embodiments, the second affordance includes a drawing affordance, the method further comprising detecting a fifth input corresponding to selecting the drawing affordance; and in response to detecting the fifth input, displaying includes a drawing area, wherein the drawing area is responsive to the touch input.

根据一些实施例,检测对应于绘图区域中的第一笔画的第六输入;并且响应于检测第六输入,在绘图区域中显示第一笔画的视觉表示。According to some embodiments, a sixth input corresponding to the first stroke in the drawing area is detected; and in response to detecting the sixth input, a visual representation of the first stroke is displayed in the drawing area.

根据一些实施例,还响应于检测第六输入,确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间是否已经过去;根据确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间已经过去,将表示第一笔画的数据发送到与第二联系人相关联的外部设备。According to some embodiments, in response to detecting a sixth input, determining whether a first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input; and based on determining that the first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input, sending data representing the first stroke to an external device associated with the second contact.

根据一些实施例,第六输入对应于包括形成绘画的第一笔画的两个或多个笔画,该方法还包括:还响应于检测第六输入,确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间是否已经过去;根据确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间已经过去,将表示绘画的数据发送到与第二联系人相关联的外部设备。According to some embodiments, the sixth input corresponds to two or more strokes comprising a first stroke forming a drawing, and the method further includes: also in response to detecting the sixth input, determining whether a first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input; and based on determining that the first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input, sending data representing the drawing to an external device associated with the second contact.

根据一些实施例,绘画区域包括绘画锁定可供件,其运行仅在绘画区域中的绘画,该方法还包括检测对应于选择绘画锁定可供件的第七输入;响应于检测第七输入,禁用发送绘画区域中表示任何笔画的数据;并且用运行将绘画传输到外部设备的发送可供件来代替绘画锁定可供件。According to some embodiments, the drawing area includes a draw lock affordance that enables drawing only in the drawing area, the method further comprising detecting a seventh input corresponding to selecting the draw lock affordance; in response to detecting the seventh input, disabling sending data representing any strokes in the drawing area; and replacing the draw lock affordance with a send affordance that enables transmission of the drawing to the external device.

根据一些实施例,检测对应于选择发送可供件的第八输入;并且响应于检测第八输入,使得能够发送在绘画区域中表示任意笔画的数据。According to some embodiments, an eighth input corresponding to selecting the send affordance is detected; and in response to detecting the eighth input, data representing any stroke in the drawing area is enabled to be sent.

根据一些实施例,电子设备包括一个或多个运动传感器,该方法还包括:接收对应于绘画区域中笔画的第九输入;响应于接收第九输入,在绘画区域中显示笔画的视觉表示;检测对应于电子设备运动的第九输入;响应于检测第九输入,确定电子设备的运动是否满足运动阈值,并且响应于检测第九输入并且根据确定该运动满足或超过运动阈值停止显示笔画的视觉表示。According to some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more motion sensors, and the method further includes: receiving a ninth input corresponding to a stroke in the drawing area; in response to receiving the ninth input, displaying a visual representation of the stroke in the drawing area; detecting a ninth input corresponding to movement of the electronic device; in response to detecting the ninth input, determining whether the movement of the electronic device satisfies a motion threshold, and stopping displaying the visual representation of the stroke in response to detecting the ninth input and based on determining that the movement satisfies or exceeds the motion threshold.

根据一些实施例,停止显示笔画的视觉表示包括在预定持续时间之后淡出第一笔画的视觉表示。According to some embodiments, ceasing to display the visual representation of the strokes comprises fading out the visual representation of the first stroke after a predetermined duration.

根据一些实施例,接收表示绘画区域中笔画的第十一输入;在接收第十一输入的同时,沿着笔画显示残留的动画消散;在绘画区域中显示笔画的视觉表示;并且从绘画区域淡出笔画的视觉表示,其中淡出视觉表示包括显示笔画的逐渐消散的动画。According to some embodiments, an eleventh input is received representing a stroke in the drawing area; while receiving the eleventh input, a residual animation is displayed along the stroke that dissipates; a visual representation of the stroke is displayed in the drawing area; and the visual representation of the stroke is faded out from the drawing area, wherein fading out the visual representation includes displaying a gradually dissipating animation of the stroke.

根据一些实施例,还响应于确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收,确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是否与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,显示绘图可供件;根据。能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人不与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,放弃显示绘图可供件。According to some embodiments, further in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period, determining whether the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a drawing; displaying the drawing affordance based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a drawing; and forgoing displaying the drawing affordance based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is not associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a drawing.

根据一些实施例,还响应于第三输入,确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是否与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,显示绘图可供件;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人不与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,放弃显示绘图可供件。According to some embodiments, also in response to a third input, it is determined whether the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a painting; based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a painting, the drawing affordance is displayed; and based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is not associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a painting, displaying the drawing affordance is abandoned.

根据一些实施例,检测表示触敏显示器上接触的第十二输入;确定第十二输入的持续满足或超过接触持续阈值;根据确定第十二输入的持续满足或超过接触持续阈值,记录音频消息;并且将音频消息发送到与第二联系人相关联的电子设备。In accordance with some embodiments, a twelfth input representing contact on the touch-sensitive display is detected; a determination is made that a duration of the twelfth input meets or exceeds a contact duration threshold; an audio message is recorded based on the determination that a duration of the twelfth input meets or exceeds the contact duration threshold; and the audio message is sent to an electronic device associated with a second contact.

根据一些实施例,接收表示可旋转输入机构的第二旋转的第十三输入;响应于接收第十三输入,确定可视指示符是否靠近不与任意联系人相关联的对象;并且根据确定可视指示符是否靠近不与任意联系人相关联的对象,更新可供件的显示到增加联系人可供件。According to some embodiments, a thirteenth input is received representing a second rotation of the rotatable input mechanism; in response to receiving the thirteenth input, a determination is made as to whether the visual indicator is proximate to an object not associated with any contact; and based on determining whether the visual indicator is proximate to an object not associated with any contact, the display of the affordance is updated to an add contact affordance.

根据一些实施例,接收对应于增加联系人的选择的第十四输入;并且响应于接收第十四输入,显示用于增加联系人的用户界面。According to some embodiments, a fourteenth input corresponding to a selection to add a contact is received; and in response to receiving the fourteenth input, a user interface for adding a contact is displayed.

根据一些实施例,可供件的可视外观是表示多个联系人的联系人的首字母的集合或者表示多个联系人的联系人的图像。According to some embodiments, the visual appearance of the affordance is a collection of initials of contacts representing the plurality of contacts or an image of a contact representing the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,首字母的集合是交织字母。According to some embodiments, the set of initials is a monogram.

根据一些实施例,多个对象包括围绕可供件定位的12个圆形的对象。According to some embodiments, the plurality of objects includes 12 circular objects positioned around the affordance.

根据一些实施例,确定从多个联系人中的一个联系人接收的一个或多个消息没有被读取;并且根据确定从多个联系人中的一个联系人接收的一个或多个消息没有被读取,显示靠近与一个或多个消息相关联的多个对象中的对象的指示符。According to some embodiments, it is determined that one or more messages received from a contact in a plurality of contacts are not read; and based on determining that the one or more messages received from the one contact in the plurality of contacts are not read, an indicator is displayed near an object in a plurality of objects associated with the one or more messages.

根据一些实施例,指示符包括一个或多个未读取消息的数目的指示。According to some embodiments, the indicator comprises an indication of a number of one or more unread messages.

根据一些实施例,多个对象中的每个对象包括唯一的颜色方案。According to some embodiments, each object in the plurality of objects includes a unique color scheme.

根据一些实施例,可视指示符包括关于可供件可移动的三角形。According to some embodiments, the visual indicator comprises a triangle that is movable with respect to the affordance.

根据一些实施例,多个对象中每个对象包括与和对象相关联的联系人相关联的首字母的集合。According to some embodiments, each object in the plurality of objects includes a set of initials associated with a contact associated with the object.

根据一些实施例,首字母的集合是交织字母。According to some embodiments, the set of initials is a monogram.

根据一些实施例,多个对象中的每个对象与时钟的小时标记相关联。According to some embodiments, each object of the plurality of objects is associated with an hour marking of a clock.

图23是图示根据一些实施例的更新可供件的可视外观的方法2300的流程图。方法2300可以被执行在具有触敏显示器和可旋转输入机构的设备(例如100、300、500和1800)。方法2300中的一些操作可以被组合,一些操作的顺序可以变化,并且一些操作可以省略。Figure 23 is a flow diagram illustrating a method 2300 for updating the visual appearance of an affordance, according to some embodiments. Method 2300 can be performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display and a rotatable input mechanism (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and 1800). Some operations in method 2300 can be combined, the order of some operations can be changed, and some operations can be omitted.

在一些实施例中,可旋转输入机构(例如可旋转输入机构506)可以配置为接收用户输入。在一些实施例中,方法2300可以在具有触敏表面/显示器(例如112、355和504)的电子设备执行。可以执行方法2300的示例设备包括设备100、300、500和1800(图1A、图2、图5A和图18A-18I)In some embodiments, a rotatable input mechanism (e.g., rotatable input mechanism 506) can be configured to receive user input. In some embodiments, method 2300 can be performed on an electronic device having a touch-sensitive surface/display (e.g., 112, 355, and 504). Example devices that can perform method 2300 include devices 100, 300, 500, and 1800 (Figures 1A, 2, 5A, and 18A-18I).

如下面描述,方法2300提供直觉的方式用于通过更新可供件的可视外观与电子设备交互。该方法减少用户上的物理和/或认知负担,用户可以在各种活动期间占用可旋转输入机构,由此创建更有效的人机接口。As described below, method 2300 provides an intuitive way to interact with an electronic device by updating the visual appearance of an affordance. The method reduces the physical and/or cognitive burden on the user, who can engage the rotatable input mechanism during various activities, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.

在框2302,方法2300可以在触敏显示器上显示包括多个对象的用户界面,每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人以及具有表示多个联系人中的第一联系人的可视外观的可供件相关联。在框2304,方法2300可以接收第一输入,该第一输入对应于选择多个对象中与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联的对象。在框2306,方法2300响应于接收对应于多个对象中的对象上的联系人的输入,更新可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人。At block 2302, method 2300 may display, on a touch-sensitive display, a user interface comprising a plurality of objects, each object associated with a contact in a plurality of contacts and an affordance having a visual appearance representing a first contact in the plurality of contacts. At block 2304, method 2300 may receive a first input corresponding to selecting an object in the plurality of objects associated with a second contact in the plurality of contacts. At block 2306, method 2300, in response to receiving the input corresponding to the contact on the object in the plurality of objects, updates the visual appearance of the affordance to represent the second contact in the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,图24示出电子设备2400的示例功能框图,电子设备2400根据各种所描述实施例的原理来配置。根据一些实施例,电子设备2400的功能框图配置为执行以上描述的技术。电子设备2400的功能框图可选地由硬件、软件、或者硬件和软件的组合来实施以实现各种所描述示例的原理。本领域技术人员应理解的是图24中描述的功能框可选地被组合或分离到子框中以实现各种所描述示例的原理。因此,本文的描述可选地支持本文所描述的功能框的任意可能的组合或分离或进一步限定。According to some embodiments, Figure 24 shows an example functional block diagram of an electronic device 2400, and the electronic device 2400 is configured according to the principle of various described embodiments. According to some embodiments, the functional block diagram of the electronic device 2400 is configured to perform the technology described above. The functional block diagram of the electronic device 2400 is optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to realize the principle of various described examples. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 24 are optionally combined or separated into subframes to realize the principle of various described examples. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further qualification of the functional blocks described herein.

如图24所示,电子设备2400包括触敏显示单元2402、可旋转输入机构2404以及耦合到触敏显示单元2402和可旋转输入机构2404的处理单元2406。在一些实施例中,处理单元2406包括接收单元2408、更新单元2410、关联单元2412、确定单元2414、检测单元2416、替换单元2418、记录单元2420、显示使能单元2422、改变单元2424、混合单元2426、转变单元2428、发送单元2430和淡出单元2432。24 , electronic device 2400 includes a touch-sensitive display unit 2402, a rotatable input mechanism 2404, and a processing unit 2406 coupled to touch-sensitive display unit 2402 and rotatable input mechanism 2404. In some embodiments, processing unit 2406 includes a receiving unit 2408, an updating unit 2410, an associating unit 2412, a determining unit 2414, a detecting unit 2416, a replacing unit 2418, a recording unit 2420, a display enabling unit 2422, a changing unit 2424, a blending unit 2426, a transforming unit 2428, a sending unit 2430, and a fading unit 2432.

处理单元2406配置为:在触敏显示单元2402上显示(例如用显示使能单元2422)包括多个对象的用户界面,每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人以及具有表示多个联系人的第一联系人的可视外观的可供件相关联;接收(例如用接收单元2408)第一输入,该第一输入对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转;以及响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入,更新(例如用更新单元2410)可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人。Processing unit 2406 is configured to: display (e.g., using display enabling unit 2422) on touch-sensitive display unit 2402 a user interface comprising a plurality of objects, each object being associated with a contact from a plurality of contacts and an affordance having a visual appearance representing a first contact from the plurality of contacts; receive (e.g., using receiving unit 2408) a first input corresponding to a rotation of a rotatable input mechanism; and in response to receiving the first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism, update (e.g., using updating unit 2410) the visual appearance of the affordance to represent a second contact from the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,用户界面还包括与多个对象中的第一对象相关联的可视指示符,第一对象与多个联系人中的第一联系人相关联。According to some embodiments, the user interface further comprises a visual indicator associated with a first object in the plurality of objects, the first object being associated with a first contact in the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为进一步响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入:停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联;而将可视指示符与多个对象中与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联的对象关联(例如用关联单元2412)。In accordance with some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to, in further response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism: stop associating the visual indicator with a first object among a plurality of objects; and associate the visual indicator with an object among the plurality of objects that is associated with a second contact among a plurality of contacts (e.g., using the associating unit 2412).

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为作为用户界面的部分,显示(例如用显示使能单元2422)根据位置值的可视指示符,该值在位置值内的范围内,多个对象中的每个对象与位置值范围内的位置相关联;还响应于第一输入,确定(例如用确定单元2414)第一输入是否是请求更新位置指示符的位置值到不与多个对象中的对象相关联的第二位置值;根据确定第一输入是请求更新位置指示符的位置值到不与多个对象中的对象相关联的第二位置值:更新时间指示符的位置值到第三位置值,该第三位置值与多个对象中最接近位置值范围内的第二位置值的对象的位置值相对应;并且根据第三位置值更新可视指示符的显示。In accordance with some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to, as part of a user interface, display (e.g., using the display enabling unit 2422) a visual indicator based on a position value that is within a range of position values, each of the multiple objects being associated with a position within the range of position values; and in response to a first input, determine (e.g., using the determining unit 2414) whether the first input is a request to update the position value of the position indicator to a second position value that is not associated with the object in the multiple objects; based on determining that the first input is a request to update the position value of the position indicator to a second position value that is not associated with the object in the multiple objects: update the position value of the time indicator to a third position value that corresponds to the position value of the object in the multiple objects that is closest to the second position value in the range of position values; and update the display of the visual indicator based on the third position value.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为其中停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联,以及将可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联包括:确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联;根据确定可旋转输入机构的旋转没有导致可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联,确定可视指示符的位置是否在对象转换区域中,其中对象转换区域是位于第一对象之后以及位于与第二联系人相关联的第二对象之前的区域;根据确定可视指示符的位置是在对象转换区域中,将可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联;根据确定可视指示符的位置不是在对象转换区域中,维持可视指示符与多个联系人中的第一联系人相关联。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to wherein stopping associating the visual indicator with the first object among multiple objects and associating the visual indicator with the second contact among multiple contacts includes: determining that rotation of the rotatable input mechanism does not cause the visual indicator to be associated with the second contact among multiple contacts; based on determining that rotation of the rotatable input mechanism does not cause the visual indicator to be associated with the second contact among multiple contacts, determining whether the position of the visual indicator is in an object conversion area, wherein the object conversion area is an area located after the first object and before the second object associated with the second contact; based on determining that the position of the visual indicator is in the object conversion area, associating the visual indicator with the second contact among multiple contacts; based on determining that the position of the visual indicator is in the object conversion area, maintaining the visual indicator in association with the first contact among multiple contacts.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为可视指示符是离散区域,其中可供件的一个或多个显示颜色被改变,该方法还包括:进一步响应于接收对应于可旋转输入机构的旋转的第一输入:改变(例如用改变单元2424)可视指示符的颜色从基于多个对象中第一对象的颜色的第一颜色到基于多个对象中第二对象的颜色的第二颜色。In accordance with some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured such that the visual indicator is a discrete area where one or more display colors of the available component are changed, and the method further includes: further in response to receiving a first input corresponding to a rotation of the rotatable input mechanism: changing (e.g., using changing unit 2424) the color of the visual indicator from a first color based on a color of a first object in a plurality of objects to a second color based on a color of a second object in a plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为改变(例如用改变单元2424)可视指示符的颜色从与多个对象中第一对象关联的第一颜色到与多个联系人中第二联系人关联的第二颜色,包括:随着可视指示符从与第一对象相关联的第一位置移动到与联系人相关联的第二对象的位置前方的第二位置,而混合(例如使用混合单元2426)第一颜色和第二颜色。In accordance with some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to change (e.g., using changing unit 2424) a color of a visual indicator from a first color associated with a first object among a plurality of objects to a second color associated with a second contact among a plurality of contacts, including blending (e.g., using blending unit 2426) the first color and the second color as the visual indicator moves from a first position associated with the first object to a second position in front of a position of the second object associated with the contact.

根据一些实施例,当时间指示符处于与第一对象的至少部分相交叠的第一位置并且第一对象的一个或多个显示颜色被改变时,可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联。According to some embodiments, the visual indicator is associated with a first object of the plurality of objects when the time indicator is in a first position overlapping at least a portion of the first object and one or more display colors of the first object are changed.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为停止将可视指示符与多个对象中的第一对象相关联,而将可视指示符与可视指示符与多个联系人中的第二联系相关联包括:将可视指示符从第一位置转变(例如用转变单元2428)到与第二对象的至少部分交叠的第二位置并且第二对象的一个或多个显示的颜色被改变。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to cease associating the visual indicator with a first object among a plurality of objects and to associate the visual indicator with a second contact among a plurality of contacts, including transitioning the visual indicator from a first position (e.g., using the transition unit 2428) to a second position that at least partially overlaps with the second object and one or more displayed colors of the second object are changed.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:当可供件表示第一联系人时,可供件的可视外观是第一联系人的动画表示,并且其中更新可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人包括更新可供件的可视外观到第二联系人的动画表示。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: when the affordance represents a first contact, the visual appearance of the affordance is an animated representation of the first contact, and wherein updating the visual appearance of the affordance to represent a second contact among the plurality of contacts includes updating the visual appearance of the affordance to an animated representation of the second contact.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:第一联系人的动画表示是动态地基于从以下组选择信息,包括:第二联系人的时区信息、第二联系人的位置信息、关于由第二联系人指定的状态的信息、以及它们的组合。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: the animated representation of the first contact is dynamically based on selecting information from the following group, including: time zone information of the second contact, location information of the second contact, information about the status specified by the second contact, and combinations thereof.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:在更新可供件的可视外观之后,接收对应于多个对象的第三对象的旋转的第二输入,第三对象与第一对象和第二对象不同,响应于接收第二输入,更新可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第三联系人。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: after updating the visual appearance of the available component, receive a second input corresponding to a rotation of a third object of the multiple objects, where the third object is different from the first object and the second object, and in response to receiving the second input, update the visual appearance of the available component to represent the third contact among the multiple contacts.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:在更新可供件的可视外观之后,确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收;并且响应于确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收,放弃显示多个对象。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: after updating the visual appearance of the affordance, determine that no input has been received for the time period; and in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period, forgo displaying the plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:在更新可供件的可视外观之后,检测(例如用检测单元2416)对应于可供件的选择的第三输入;并且响应于检测第三输入,放弃显示多个对象。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: after updating the visual appearance of the affordance, detect (e.g., with detection unit 2416) a third input corresponding to selection of the affordance; and in response to detecting the third input, relinquish display of the plurality of objects.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:还响应于确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收,显示(例如用显示使能单元2422)第二可供件。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: further in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period, display (eg, with display enabling unit 2422 ) a second affordance.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:还响应于检测第三输入,显示第二可供件。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: further in response to detecting the third input, display a second affordance.

根据一些实施例,第二可供件包括选自以下组的一个或多个可供件,包括:呼叫可供件、消息可供件、辅导可供件、恢复包括多个对象的用户界面的可供件,以及绘图可供件。According to some embodiments, the second affordance includes one or more affordances selected from the group consisting of: a call affordance, a message affordance, a coaching affordance, an affordance that restores a user interface including a plurality of objects, and a drawing affordance.

根据一些实施例,第二可供件是辅导可供件,该方法还包括:检测(例如用检测单元2416)对应于选择辅导可供件的第四输入;并且响应于检测第四输入,显示包括用于操作电子设备的一个或多个指令的用户界面。According to some embodiments, the second offer is a coaching offer, and the method further includes: detecting (e.g., using detection unit 2416) a fourth input corresponding to selecting the coaching offer; and in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying a user interface including one or more instructions for operating the electronic device.

根据一些实施例,第二可供件包括绘图可供件,处理单元2406还配置为:检测对应于选择绘图可供件的第五输入;并且响应于检测第五输入,显示包括绘图区域,其中绘图区域响应于触摸输入。According to some embodiments, the second affordance includes a drawing affordance, and processing unit 2406 is further configured to: detect a fifth input corresponding to selecting the drawing affordance; and in response to detecting the fifth input, display including a drawing area, wherein the drawing area is responsive to the touch input.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:检测对应于绘图区域中的第一笔画的第六输入;并且响应于检测第六输入,在绘图区域中显示第一笔画的视觉表示。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: detect a sixth input corresponding to the first stroke in the drawing area; and in response to detecting the sixth input, display a visual representation of the first stroke in the drawing area.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:还响应于检测第六输入,确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间是否已经过去;根据确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间已经过去,将表示第一笔画的数据发送(例如用发送单元2430)到与第二联系人相关联的外部设备。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: also in response to detecting a sixth input, determine whether a first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input; and based on determining that the first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input, send data representing the first stroke (e.g., using the sending unit 2430) to an external device associated with the second contact.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:第六输入对应于包括形成绘画的第一笔画的两个或多个笔画,该方法还包括:还响应于检测第六输入,确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间是否已经过去;根据确定在第六输入之后第一预定持续时间已经过去,将表示绘画的数据发送到与第二联系人相关联的外部设备。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: the sixth input corresponds to two or more strokes including the first stroke forming a painting, and the method further includes: also in response to detecting the sixth input, determining whether a first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input; and based on determining that the first predetermined duration has passed after the sixth input, sending data representing the painting to an external device associated with the second contact.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:绘画区域包括绘画锁定可供件,其运行仅在绘画区域中的绘画,该方法还包括检测对应于选择绘画锁定可供件的第七输入;响应于检测第七输入,禁用发送绘画区域中表示任何笔画的数据;并且用运行将绘画传输到外部设备的发送可供件来代替(例如用替代单元2418)绘画锁定可供件。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: the drawing area includes a drawing lock affordance that enables drawing only in the drawing area, the method further comprising detecting a seventh input corresponding to selecting the drawing lock affordance; in response to detecting the seventh input, disabling sending data representing any strokes in the drawing area; and replacing (e.g., with replacement unit 2418) the drawing lock affordance with a sending affordance that enables transmission of the drawing to an external device.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:检测对应于选择发送可供件的第八输入;并且响应于检测第八输入,使得能够发送在绘画区域中表示任意笔画的数据。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: detect an eighth input corresponding to selecting the send affordance; and in response to detecting the eighth input, enable sending of data representing any stroke in the drawing area.

根据一些实施例,电子设备包括一个或多个运动传感器,处理单元2406还配置为:接收对应于绘画区域中笔画的第九输入;响应于接收第九输入,在绘画区域中显示笔画的视觉表示;检测对应于电子设备运动的第九输入;响应于检测第九输入,确定电子设备的运动是否满足运动阈值,并且响应于检测第九输入并且根据确定该运动满足或超过运动阈值停止显示笔画的视觉表示。According to some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more motion sensors, and the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: receive a ninth input corresponding to a stroke in the drawing area; in response to receiving the ninth input, display a visual representation of the stroke in the drawing area; detect a ninth input corresponding to movement of the electronic device; in response to detecting the ninth input, determine whether the movement of the electronic device satisfies a motion threshold, and stop displaying the visual representation of the stroke in response to detecting the ninth input and based on determining that the movement satisfies or exceeds the motion threshold.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:停止显示笔画的视觉表示包括在预定持续时间之后淡出(例如用淡出单元2432)第一笔画的视觉表示。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: stop displaying the visual representation of the stroke comprises fading out (eg, using a fading unit 2432) the visual representation of the first stroke after a predetermined duration.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:接收表示绘画区域中笔画的第十一输入;在接收第十一输入的同时,沿着笔画显示残留的动画消散;在绘画区域中显示笔画的视觉表示;并且从绘画区域淡出笔画的视觉表示,其中淡出视觉表示包括显示笔画的逐渐消散的动画。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: receive an eleventh input representing a stroke in the drawing area; while receiving the eleventh input, display a residual animation dissipating along the stroke; display a visual representation of the stroke in the drawing area; and fade out the visual representation of the stroke from the drawing area, wherein fading out the visual representation includes displaying an animation of the stroke gradually dissipating.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:还响应于确定对于时间段已经没有输入被接收,确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是否与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,显示绘图可供件;根据。能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人不与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,放弃显示绘图可供件。According to some embodiments, processing unit 2406 is further configured to: further in response to determining that no input has been received for the time period, determine whether the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a drawing; display the drawing affordance based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a drawing; and forgo displaying the drawing affordance based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is not associated with a device capable of processing and displaying data representing strokes in a drawing.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:还响应于第三输入,确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是否与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人是与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,显示绘图可供件;根据确定当前由可供件表示的联系人不与能处理和显示表示绘画中笔画的数据的设备相关联,放弃显示绘图可供件。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: also in response to a third input, determine whether the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device that can process and display data representing strokes in a painting; based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is associated with a device that can process and display data representing strokes in a painting, display the drawing affordance; and based on determining that the contact currently represented by the affordance is not associated with a device that can process and display data representing strokes in a painting, abandon displaying the drawing affordance.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:检测表示触敏显示器上接触的第十二输入;确定第十二输入的持续满足或超过接触持续阈值;根据确定第十二输入的持续满足或超过接触持续阈值,记录音频消息;并且将音频消息发送到与第二联系人相关联的电子设备。In accordance with some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: detect a twelfth input representing contact on the touch-sensitive display; determine that the continuation of the twelfth input meets or exceeds a contact duration threshold; record an audio message based on determining that the continuation of the twelfth input meets or exceeds the contact duration threshold; and send the audio message to an electronic device associated with a second contact.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:接收表示可旋转输入机构的第二旋转的第十三输入;响应于接收第十三输入,确定可视指示符是否靠近不与任意联系人相关联的对象;并且根据确定可视指示符是否靠近不与任意联系人相关联的对象,更新可供件的显示到增加联系人可供件。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: receive a thirteenth input representing a second rotation of the rotatable input mechanism; in response to receiving the thirteenth input, determine whether the visual indicator is close to an object that is not associated with any contact; and based on determining whether the visual indicator is close to an object that is not associated with any contact, update the display of the affordance to an add contact affordance.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:接收对应于增加联系人的选择的第十四输入;并且响应于接收第十四输入,显示用于增加联系人的用户界面。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: receive a fourteenth input corresponding to a selection to add a contact; and in response to receiving the fourteenth input, display a user interface for adding a contact.

根据一些实施例,可供件的可视外观是表示多个联系人的联系人的首字母的集合或者表示多个联系人的联系人的图像。According to some embodiments, the visual appearance of the affordance is a collection of initials of contacts representing the plurality of contacts or an image of a contact representing the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,首字母的集合是交织字母。According to some embodiments, the set of initials is a monogram.

根据一些实施例,多个对象包括围绕可供件定位的12个圆形的对象。According to some embodiments, the plurality of objects includes 12 circular objects positioned around the affordance.

根据一些实施例,处理单元2406还配置为:确定从多个联系人中的一个联系人接收的一个或多个消息没有被读取;并且根据确定从多个联系人中的一个联系人接收的一个或多个消息没有被读取,显示靠近与一个或多个消息相关联的多个对象中的对象的指示符。According to some embodiments, the processing unit 2406 is further configured to: determine that one or more messages received from one of the multiple contacts have not been read; and based on determining that one or more messages received from one of the multiple contacts have not been read, display an indicator of an object among the multiple objects associated with the one or more messages.

根据一些实施例,指示符包括一个或多个未读取消息的数目的指示。According to some embodiments, the indicator comprises an indication of a number of one or more unread messages.

根据一些实施例,多个对象中的每个对象包括唯一的颜色方案。According to some embodiments, each object in the plurality of objects includes a unique color scheme.

根据一些实施例,可视指示符包括关于可供件可移动的三角形。According to some embodiments, the visual indicator comprises a triangle that is movable with respect to the affordance.

根据一些实施例,多个对象中每个对象包括与和对象相关联的联系人相关联的首字母的集合。According to some embodiments, each object in the plurality of objects includes a set of initials associated with a contact associated with the object.

根据一些实施例,首字母的集合是交织字母。According to some embodiments, the set of initials is a monogram.

根据一些实施例,多个对象中的每个对象与时钟的小时标记相关联。According to some embodiments, each object of the plurality of objects is associated with an hour marking of a clock.

根据一些实施例,为显示包括多个对象的用户界面,处理单元2406还配置为显示包括与用户界面的第一页面和第二页面相关联的页码指示符的用户界面,处理单元还配置为:接收(例如用接收单元2408)对应于请求显示第二页面的输入;响应于接收对应于请求显示第二页面的输入,用第二页面替代(例如用替代单元2418)第一页面的显示,其中第二页面与第一页面不同。According to some embodiments, in order to display a user interface including multiple objects, the processing unit 2406 is also configured to display a user interface including page number indicators associated with a first page and a second page of the user interface, and the processing unit is further configured to: receive (for example, using the receiving unit 2408) an input corresponding to a request to display the second page; in response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to display the second page, replace the display of the first page with the second page (for example, using the replacing unit 2418), wherein the second page is different from the first page.

根据一些实施例,第二页面包括多个对象中第二对象,每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人相关联。According to some embodiments, the second page includes a second object of the plurality of objects, each object being associated with a contact of the plurality of contacts.

根据一些实施例,用户界面与第一页面相关联,并且第二用户界面与第二用户即可相关联,并且其中用第二页面替代第一页面的显示包括用第二用户界面替代用户界面。According to some embodiments, a user interface is associated with the first page and a second user interface is associated with the second user interface, and wherein replacing display of the first page with the second page includes replacing the user interface with the second user interface.

根据一些实施例,输入是触敏显示器上的轻扫手势。According to some embodiments, the input is a swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive display.

根据一些实施例,图25示出根据各种描述实施例的原理配置的电子设备2500的示例功能框图。根据一些实施例,电子设备2500的功能框图配置为执行上文描述的技术。设备2500的功能框图可选地由硬件、软件或硬件和软件的组合来实施以执行各种描述示例的原理。本领域技术人员应理解图25中描述的功能框图可选地被组合或分离到子框中以实现各种描述示例的原理。因此,本文描述可选地支持上文描述的功能框的任意可能组合或者分离或进一步限定。According to some embodiments, Figure 25 shows an example functional block diagram of an electronic device 2500 configured according to the principles of various description embodiments. According to some embodiments, the functional block diagram of the electronic device 2500 is configured to perform the technology described above. The functional block diagram of the device 2500 is optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to perform the principles of the various description examples. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional block diagram described in Figure 25 is optionally combined or separated into sub-frames to implement the principles of the various description examples. Therefore, this document describes and optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further limitation of the functional blocks described above.

如图25所示,电子设备2500包括触敏显示单元2502,可旋转输入机构2504以及耦合到触敏显示单元2502和可旋转输入机构2504的处理单元2506。在一些实施例中,处理单元2506包括接收单元2508、更新单元2510和显示使能单元。25 , electronic device 2500 includes a touch-sensitive display unit 2502, a rotatable input mechanism 2504, and a processing unit 2506 coupled to the touch-sensitive display unit 2502 and the rotatable input mechanism 2504. In some embodiments, processing unit 2506 includes a receiving unit 2508, an updating unit 2510, and a display enabling unit.

处理单元2406还配置为:在触敏显示单元2502上显示(例如用显示使能单元)包括多个对象的用户界面,每个对象与多个联系人中的联系人以及具有表示多个联系人中的第一联系人的可视外观的可供件相关联;接收(例如用接收单元2508)第一输入,该第一输入对应于选择多个对象中与多个联系人中的第二联系人相关联的对象;并且响应于接收对应于多个对象中对象上的联系人的输入,更新(例如用更新单元2510)可供件的可视外观以表示多个联系人中的第二联系人。The processing unit 2406 is also configured to: display (e.g., using a display enabling unit) on the touch-sensitive display unit 2502 a user interface comprising a plurality of objects, each object being associated with a contact in a plurality of contacts and an affordance having a visual appearance representing a first contact in the plurality of contacts; receive (e.g., using a receiving unit 2508) a first input corresponding to selecting an object in the plurality of objects that is associated with a second contact in the plurality of contacts; and in response to receiving the input corresponding to a contact on an object in the plurality of objects, update (e.g., using an updating unit 2510) the visual appearance of the affordance to represent the second contact in the plurality of contacts.

出于解释的目的,前文的描述已经参考特定实施例而描述。然而,上文说明下的讨论并不旨在穷尽性的或者限制本发明为公开的精确形式。鉴于以上教导很多修改和变型是可能的。实施例被选择和描述以便最好解释这些技术的原理和它们的实际应用。本领域其它技术人员由此能够最好利用这些技术和具有各种修改的各种实施例作为适于预期的特定用途。For purposes of explanation, the foregoing description has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the discussion below the foregoing description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Numerous modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings. The embodiments have been chosen and described to best illustrate the principles of these techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art will thus be able to best utilize these techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as suited to the particular application contemplated.

尽管本公开和示例已经完全参考附图被描述,应注意的是各种改变和修改对本领域技术人员来说是显然的。这样的改变和修改应理解为被包括在本公开以及由所附权利要求所限定的示例的范围内。Although the present disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it should be noted that various changes and modifications will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications should be understood to be included within the scope of the present disclosure and examples defined by the appended claims.

Claims (42)

1.一种电子设备,被配置为外部设备通信,所述外部设备与联系人相关联,所述电子设备包括:1. An electronic device configured to communicate with an external device, the external device being associated with a contact, the electronic device comprising: 显示单元,被配置为显示图形用户界面;a display unit configured to display a graphical user interface; 触敏表面单元,被配置为接收接触;以及a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive contact; and 处理单元,被耦合至所述显示单元和所述触敏表面单元,所述处理单元被配置为:a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processing unit being configured to: 接收对表示所述联系人的所显示的可供件的用户选择;receiving a user selection of a displayed affordance representing the contact; 在接收到所述选择后,检测触敏显示器上的触摸输入;upon receiving the selection, detecting a touch input on the touch-sensitive display; 确定触摸输入是单指触摸输入还是多指触摸输入;Determine whether the touch input is a single-finger touch input or a multi-finger touch input; 根据确定所述触摸输入是单指触摸输入,向所述外部设备发送数据,所述数据表示所述单指触摸输入;以及sending data to the external device based on determining that the touch input is a single-finger touch input, the data representing the single-finger touch input; and 根据确定所述触摸输入是多指触摸输入,向所述外部设备发送数据,其中所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备显示与所述多指触摸输入相对应的可视指示符,进一步其中:Based on determining that the touch input is a multi-touch input, sending data to the external device, wherein the data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display a visual indicator corresponding to the multi-touch input, further wherein: 表示所述单指触摸输入的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备,以显示不同于所述可视指示符的可视表示而不显示所述可视指示符;以及the data representing the single-finger touch input, when received by the external device, triggering the external device to display a visual representation different from the visual indicator without displaying the visual indicator; and 表示所述多指触摸输入的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备,以显示所述可视指示符而不显示所述可视表示。The data representing the multi-touch input, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display the visual indicator without displaying the visual representation. 2.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供对应于所述单指触摸输入的输出。2 . The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide an output corresponding to the single-finger touch input. 3.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备显示:3. The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display: 接收所述数据的通知;以及receiving notification of said data; and 可供件,所述可供件在被选择时,使得所述外部设备显示所述单指触摸输入的可视表示。An affordance that, when selected, causes the external device to display a visual representation of the single-finger touch input. 4.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,4. The electronic device according to claim 1, 其中为了检测所述电子设备的所述触敏显示器上的触摸输入,所述处理单元被进一步配置为在所述触敏显示器上的位置处检测所述单指触摸输入,并且wherein in order to detect a touch input on the touch-sensitive display of the electronic device, the processing unit is further configured to detect the single-finger touch input at a position on the touch-sensitive display, and 其中所述单指触摸输入的所述可视表示在被显示时,在对应于检测到所述单指触摸输入的所述位置的定位处被显示在所述外部设备的屏幕上。The visual representation of the single-finger touch input, when displayed, is displayed on the screen of the external device at a location corresponding to the position where the single-finger touch input is detected. 5.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中所述可视表示包括一个或多个圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。5 . The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the visual representation comprises one or more circles, ellipses, and/or ovals. 6.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中所述可视表示包括两个或更多个同心的圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。6 . The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the visual representation comprises two or more concentric circles, ellipses, and/or ovals. 7.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中所述外部设备上的可视表示在被显示了预定时间量后淡出。7 . The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the visual representation on the external device fades out after being displayed for a predetermined amount of time. 8.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中所述单指触摸输入是单指叩击。The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the single-finger touch input is a single-finger tap. 9.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中所述处理单元被进一步配置为:9. The electronic device according to claim 1, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: 根据检测的所述触摸输入表示多指触摸输入的确定,向所述外部设备发送数据,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以针对所述多指触摸输入的持续而显示所述可视指示符。Based on a determination that the detected touch input represents a multi-touch input, data is sent to the external device, wherein the sent data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display the visual indicator for continuation of the multi-touch input. 10.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供对应于所述多指触摸输入的输出,并且其中对应于所述多指触摸输入的所述输出包括:10. The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide an output corresponding to the multi-touch input, and wherein the output corresponding to the multi-touch input comprises: 所述数据的接收的通知;以及notification of receipt of said data; and 可供件,所述可供件在被选择时,使得所述处理单元针对所述多指触摸输入的持续来使能所述可视指示符的显示。An affordance that, when selected, causes the processing unit to enable display of the visual indicator for continuation of the multi-touch input. 11.根据权利要求9所述的电子设备,其中所述可视指示符是图像。The electronic device of claim 9 , wherein the visual indicator is an image. 12.根据权利要求9所述的电子设备,其中所述可视指示符是动画图像。12. The electronic device of claim 9, wherein the visual indicator is an animated image. 13.根据权利要求9所述的电子设备,其中所述可视指示符是搏动的心脏的动画图像。13. The electronic device of claim 9, wherein the visual indicator is an animated image of a beating heart. 14.根据权利要求13所述的电子设备,其中所述电子设备进一步包括生物传感器,所述生物传感器被配置为检测心跳速率,其中所述搏动的心脏的搏动的速率基于检测到的所述心跳速率。14 . The electronic device of claim 13 , wherein the electronic device further comprises a biosensor configured to detect a heartbeat rate, wherein the rate of the beating of the beating heart is based on the detected heartbeat rate. 15.根据权利要求13所述的电子设备,其中所述电子设备进一步包括生物传感器,所述生物传感器被配置为检测心跳速率,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备提供对应于检测到的所述心跳速率的触觉输出。15. An electronic device according to claim 13, wherein the electronic device further comprises a biosensor configured to detect a heartbeat rate, wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide a tactile output corresponding to the detected heartbeat rate. 16.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供触觉输出。16. The electronic device of claim 1, wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide a tactile output. 17.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备,其中所述电子设备包括可旋转输入机构,其中为了接收对所述联系人的用户选择,所述处理单元被进一步配置为:17. The electronic device of claim 1 , wherein the electronic device comprises a rotatable input mechanism, wherein to receive a user selection of the contact, the processing unit is further configured to: 使能表示联系人的多个可供件的显示;enabling display of multiple affordances representing contacts; 检测表示所述可旋转输入机构的移动的用户输入;以及detecting user input representing movement of the rotatable input mechanism; and 响应于检测所述用户输入:使能多个用户指定的联系人的所述显示的缩放,其中缩放所述显示包括改变正在被显示的联系人的大小。In response to detecting the user input: enabling scaling of the display of a plurality of user-specified contacts, wherein scaling the display includes changing a size of the contacts being displayed. 18.根据权利要求17所述的电子设备,其中为了使能所述显示的缩放,所述处理单元被进一步配置为使能正在被显示的联系人的数量的改变。18 . The electronic device of claim 17 , wherein to enable scaling of the display, the processing unit is further configured to enable a change in the number of contacts being displayed. 19.根据权利要求17所述的电子设备,其中所述处理单元被进一步配置为:19. The electronic device according to claim 17, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: 在使能表示联系人的所述多个可供件的显示时,检测显示的可供件上的触摸输入;以及While enabling display of the plurality of affordances representing contacts, detecting touch input on the displayed affordances; and 响应于检测到所述触摸输入,向与所述联系人相关联的所述外部设备发送数据,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供触觉输出。In response to detecting the touch input, data is sent to the external device associated with the contact, wherein the sent data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide a tactile output. 20.根据权利要求19所述的电子设备,其中为了检测显示的所述可供件上的所述触摸输入,所述处理单元被进一步配置为检测预定持续时间内由在显示的所述可供件上的第二触摸和释放跟随的在显示的所述可供件上的第一触摸和释放。20. An electronic device according to claim 19, wherein to detect the touch input on the displayed affordance, the processing unit is further configured to detect a first touch and release on the displayed affordance followed by a second touch and release on the displayed affordance within a predetermined duration. 21.一种通信方法,包括:21. A communication method, comprising: 在具有触敏显示器的电子设备处执行以下步骤,所述电子设备被配置为与外部设备通信,所述外部设备与联系人相关联:The following steps are performed at an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, the electronic device being configured to communicate with an external device, the external device being associated with a contact: 接收对表示所述联系人的所显示的可供件的用户选择;receiving a user selection of a displayed affordance representing the contact; 在接收到所述选择后,检测所述触敏显示器上的触摸输入;upon receiving the selection, detecting a touch input on the touch-sensitive display; 确定触摸输入是单指触摸输入还是多指触摸输入;Determine whether the touch input is a single-finger touch input or a multi-finger touch input; 根据所述触摸输入是单指触摸输入的确定,向所述外部设备发送数据,所述数据表示所述单指触摸输入;以及Based on a determination that the touch input is a single-finger touch input, sending data to the external device, the data representing the single-finger touch input; and 根据所述触摸输入是多指触摸输入的确定,向所述外部设备发送数据,其中所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备显示与所述多指触摸输入相对应的可视指示符,进一步其中:Based on a determination that the touch input is a multi-touch input, sending data to the external device, wherein the data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display a visual indicator corresponding to the multi-touch input, further wherein: 表示所述单指触摸输入的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备,以显示不同于所述可视指示符的可视表示而不显示所述可视指示符;以及the data representing the single-finger touch input, when received by the external device, triggering the external device to display a visual representation different from the visual indicator without displaying the visual indicator; and 表示所述多指触摸输入的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备,以显示所述可视指示符而不显示所述可视表示。The data representing the multi-touch input, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display the visual indicator without displaying the visual representation. 22.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供对应于所述单指触摸输入的输出。22. The communication method of claim 21, wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide an output corresponding to the single-finger touch input. 23.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以显示:23. The communication method of claim 21 , wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display: 接收所述数据的通知;以及receiving notification of said data; and 可供件,所述可供件在被选择时,使得所述外部设备显示所述单指触摸输入的可视表示。An affordance that, when selected, causes the external device to display a visual representation of the single-finger touch input. 24.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,24. The communication method according to claim 21, 其中检测所述电子设备的所述触敏显示器上的触摸输入包括:在所述触敏显示器上的位置处检测所述单指触摸输入,并且Wherein detecting a touch input on the touch-sensitive display of the electronic device comprises: detecting the single-finger touch input at a position on the touch-sensitive display, and 其中所述单指触摸输入的所述可视表示在被显示时,在对应于检测到所述单指触摸输入的所述位置的定位处被显示在所述外部设备的屏幕上。The visual representation of the single-finger touch input, when displayed, is displayed on the screen of the external device at a location corresponding to the position where the single-finger touch input is detected. 25.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中所述可视表示包括一个或多个圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。25. The communication method of claim 21, wherein the visual representation comprises one or more circles, ellipses and/or ovals. 26.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中所述可视表示包括两个或更多个同心的圆、椭圆和/或卵圆。26. The communication method of claim 21, wherein the visual representation comprises two or more concentric circles, ellipses and/or ovals. 27.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,所述外部设备上的可视表示在被显示了预定时间量后淡出。27. The communication method of claim 21, wherein the visual representation on the external device fades out after being displayed for a predetermined amount of time. 28.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中所述单指触摸输入是单指叩击。28. The communication method of claim 21, wherein the single-finger touch input is a single-finger tap. 29.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,进一步包括:29. The communication method according to claim 21, further comprising: 根据检测的所述触摸输入表示多指触摸输入的确定,向所述外部设备发送数据,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以针对所述多指触摸输入的持续而显示所述可视指示符。Based on a determination that the detected touch input represents a multi-touch input, data is sent to the external device, wherein the sent data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to display the visual indicator for continuation of the multi-touch input. 30.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供对应于所述多指触摸输入的输出,并且其中对应于所述多指触摸输入的所述输出包括:30. The communication method of claim 21 , wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide an output corresponding to the multi-touch input, and wherein the output corresponding to the multi-touch input comprises: 所述数据的接收的通知;以及notification of receipt of said data; and 可供件,所述可供件在被选择时,使得所述外部设备针对所述多指触摸输入的持续来使能所述可视指示符的显示。An affordance that, when selected, causes the external device to enable display of the visual indicator for continuation of the multi-touch input. 31.根据权利要求29所述的通信方法,其中所述可视指示符是图像。31. The communication method of claim 29, wherein the visual indicator is an image. 32.根据权利要求29所述的通信方法,其中所述可视指示符是动画图像。32. The communication method of claim 29, wherein the visual indicator is an animated image. 33.根据权利要求29所述的通信方法,其中所述可视指示符是搏动的心脏的动画图像。33. The communication method of claim 29, wherein the visual indicator is an animated image of a beating heart. 34.根据权利要求33所述的通信方法,其中所述电子设备进一步包括生物传感器,所述生物传感器被配置为检测心跳速率,其中所述搏动的心脏的搏动的速率基于检测到的所述心跳速率。34. The communication method of claim 33, wherein the electronic device further comprises a biosensor configured to detect a heartbeat rate, wherein the rate of the beating of the beating heart is based on the detected heartbeat rate. 35.根据权利要求33所述的通信方法,其中所述电子设备进一步包括生物传感器,所述生物传感器被配置为检测心跳速率,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备提供对应于检测到的所述心跳速率的触觉输出。35. A communication method according to claim 33, wherein the electronic device further includes a biosensor configured to detect a heartbeat rate, wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide a tactile output corresponding to the detected heartbeat rate. 36.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供触觉输出。36. The communication method of claim 21, wherein the transmitted data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide a tactile output. 37.根据权利要求21所述的通信方法,其中所述电子设备包括可旋转输入机构,其中接收对所述联系人的用户选择包括:37. The communication method of claim 21 , wherein the electronic device includes a rotatable input mechanism, wherein receiving a user selection of the contact comprises: 在所述电子设备处:At the electronic device: 显示表示联系人的多个可供件;displaying multiple affordances representing contacts; 检测表示所述可旋转输入机构的移动的用户输入;以及detecting user input representing movement of the rotatable input mechanism; and 响应于检测所述用户输入:缩放多个用户指定的联系人的所述显示,其中缩放所述显示包括改变正在被显示的联系人的大小。In response to detecting the user input: scaling the display of a plurality of user-specified contacts, wherein scaling the display includes changing a size of the contacts being displayed. 38.根据权利要求37所述的通信方法,其中缩放所述显示包括改变正在被显示的联系人的数量。38. The communication method of claim 37, wherein scaling the display comprises changing the number of contacts being displayed. 39.根据权利要求37所述的通信方法,进一步包括:39. The communication method according to claim 37, further comprising: 在显示表示联系人的所述多个可供件时,检测显示的可供件上的触摸输入;以及While displaying the plurality of affordances representing contacts, detecting touch input on the displayed affordances; and 响应于检测所述触摸输入,向与所述联系人相关联的所述外部设备发送数据,其中发送的所述数据在由所述外部设备接收到时触发所述外部设备以提供触觉输出。In response to detecting the touch input, data is sent to the external device associated with the contact, wherein the sent data, when received by the external device, triggers the external device to provide a tactile output. 40.根据权利要求39所述的通信方法,其中检测显示的所述可供件上的所述触摸输入包括:检测预定持续时间内由在显示的所述可供件上的第二触摸和释放跟随的在显示的所述可供件上的第一触摸和释放。40. The communication method of claim 39, wherein detecting the touch input on the displayed affordance comprises detecting a first touch and release on the displayed affordance followed by a second touch and release on the displayed affordance within a predetermined duration. 41.一种电子装置,包括用于执行根据权利要求21至40中任一项所述的通信方法的部件。41. An electronic device comprising means for executing the communication method according to any one of claims 21 to 40. 42.一种计算机可读介质,具有存储于其上的计算机可读指令,所述计算机可读指令当被执行时使设备执行根据权利要求21至40中任一项所述的通信方法。42. A computer readable medium having stored thereon computer readable instructions which, when executed, cause a device to perform the communication method according to any one of claims 21 to 40.
HK16109057.3A 2014-09-02 2016-07-28 Electronic touch communication HK1221041B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201462044961P 2014-09-02 2014-09-02
US62/044,961 2014-09-02
US201562129955P 2015-03-08 2015-03-08
US62/129,955 2015-03-08
USPCT/US2015/034609 2015-06-07
PCT/US2015/034609 WO2016036427A1 (en) 2014-09-02 2015-06-07 Electronic device with rotatable input mechanism

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
HK1221041A1 HK1221041A1 (en) 2017-05-19
HK1221041B true HK1221041B (en) 2021-01-22

Family

ID=

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12260039B2 (en) Electronic communication based on user input
US11579721B2 (en) Displaying a representation of a user touch input detected by an external device
HK1221041B (en) Electronic touch communication
HK1221040B (en) Electronic touch communication